JEE Companion

For JEE MAIN

PHYSICS
MODULE-7
 CONTENTS

CHAPTER – 09 : REFLECTION PLANE & CURVED SURFACE

THEORY 01-05
EXERCISE 06-27
ANSWER KEY 27

CHAPTER – 10 : REFRACTION PLANE & CURVED SURFACE

THEORY 28-36
EXERCISE 37-67
ANSWER KEY 68

CHAPTER – 11 : WAVE OPTICS

THEORY 69-75
EXERCISE 76-101
ANSWER KEY 102
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
CHAPTER

REFLECTION AT PLANE & CURVED SURFACE

1. INTRODUCTION optics can be treated as the limiting case of wave
• The branch of physics which deals with the nature optics when size of obstacle or opening is very
of light, its sources, properties, effects and vision much larger than the wavelength of light. Under
is called optics. Light is that form of energy which such conditions, wave nature of light can be
makes objects visible to our eye. ignored and light can be assumed to be travelling
in straight line (rectilinear propagation). But when
 Uses size of obstacle or opening is comparable to
The science of optics is by far an important part of wavelength of light, rectilinear propagation is no
our life and our economy. It is due to optics that longer valid and resulting phenomena are
we have discovered our universe from the explained by using wave nature of light.
microscopic virus to the largest galaxy. It is due to 3. REFLECTION AND ITS LAWS
optics that we see the colours of a rainbow,
• When light falls on the surface of a material it is
sparkling of diamond, twinkling of stars, shining
either re-emitted without change in frequency or is
of air bubble in water etc.
absorbed in the material and turned into heat.
2. NATURE, PROPERTIES AND BEHAVIOR When the re-emitted light is returned into the same
• Huygens gave wave theory of light. Maxwell medium from which it comes, it is called reflected
showed that light is an electromagnetic wave, light and the process is known reflection.
which consists of oscillation of electric field and  Law of Reflection:
magnetic field perpendicular to each other and
perpendicular to direction of propagation in space. (N) (N)
The wavelength of light typically varies from
(I) (R) (I) (R)
400 nm to 700 nm. The limits of the visible i r i r
spectrum are not well defined because the eye T Reflecting T
sensitivity curve approaches the axis (P) Surface (P)
asymptotically at both long and short wavelengths.
This theory explained beautifully reflection, Note:
refraction, interference, diffraction and To apply laws of reflection draw tangent (T) and
polarization. Normal (N) at the point of reflection (P)
st
• Photoelectric effect, Compton effect and several 1 Law: Incident ray (I), normal (N) and reflected
other phenomena associated with emission and ray (R) are in same plane.
nd
absorption of light could not be explained by wave 2 Law: Angle of incidence = Angle of reflection
theory. Therefore, quantum theory of light was ⇒ ∠i = ∠r
developed, mainly by Planck and Einstein. At 4. MIRRORS
present it is believed that light has dual nature i.e.,
it propagates as a wave but interacts with matter as
a particle.
1. Plane Mirror
 Classification into geometrical and wave optics,
and its necessity
To make the study of optics easy, it is divided into
two parts.
2. Concave Mirror
 Geometrical or Ray Optics:
The phenomena of rectilinear propagation of light,
reflection and refraction, are studied in this
section.
 Wave Optics: 3. Convex Mirror
The wave behavior of light (like diffraction and
interference) is studied in this section. Geometrical

aaa
1
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
 Reflection at plane surface with different • Case 2:
examples Image Formation of Point Object by
Plane Mirror: B B’
1. Point of intersection of incident light ray is known
as object.
2. The point of intersection of reflected rays or A A’
refracted ray is known as image.
Note: 
The object and image may be real or virtual 5. RANGE OF DIVISION, DEVIATION
3. For real object the image formed by plane mirror PRODUCED BY MIRROR
is virtual.  Angle of Deviation:
The angle between the direction of incident and
reflected light ray is known as angle of deviation.

i r i r
δ δ
Virtual Image Real Object

4. For virtual object image formed by plane mirror is

real. Angle of deviation δ = π − (i + r)
Assume ∠i =∠r =α, then δ = π − (2α)
(angle of deviation)
180º

90º (angle of
 Field of view: incidence)
Region in which diverging rays from object or  Normal incidence:
image are actually present is known as field of
view. (N)
• Case 1: (N)
Field of view for real object (R) (R)
(I) (I)
Field of view
Field of view
I O I

∠i = ∠r = 0, δ=π
 Grazing Incidence:
• Case 2:
Field of view for virtual object
(N) (N)

(I) (R)
(I) (R)
Field of view
O I

∠i = 90° = ∠r and δ =0
 Image formation of extended object by plane
mirror: 6. PROPERTIES OF IMAGE FORMED BY
• Case 1:
PLANE MIRROR
B B’ • Properties of Image Formed by a Plane Mirror
of an Extended Object
A (i) Size of the object = size of the image
A’
(ii) Image is laterally inverted.

2
 PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
Example-01  Combination of Plane Mirrors
• To find net deviation produced by combination
A man is standing at distance x from plane mirror
of plane mirror and deviation produced by each
in front of him. He wants to see the entire wall in
mirror which is at distance y behind the man. Find mirror. While adding the deviation ensures that
they must be in same direction either clockwise
the size of mirror?
or anticlockwise.
Solution:
From ∆O ' M1M 2 and ∆ O 'AB
Example-03
M1M 2 x
= Two plane mirrors are inclined at 30º as shown in
h 2x + y figure. A light ray is incident at angle 45º. Find
hx total deviation produced by combination of mirror
Size of mirror, M1M 2 = after two successive reflection.
(2x + y)

Note:
h
=If x y,=
M1M 2 30º 45º
3
M1
A’
A Solution:
Deviation at mirror M1
M1
δ1= 180° − 2 × 45°= 90° ↑ (Clockwise)
h
y x x O’ Deviation at mirror M 2 , δ2 =180º - 2 × 15º = 150º↓
O
(Anti clockwise)
M2
Total deviation δ = δ2 − δ1 = 150º - 90º =60º↑
B
B’
(Anti clockwise)

 Rotation of Plane Mirror: • IMAGES FORMED BY TWO MIRRORS

1. If a plane mirror is rotated through an angle q • CASE 1:
about an axis in the plane of mirror then reflected When the mirrors are parallel to each other
ray, image and spot are rotated through an M1 M2
angle 2q in the same sense.
2. If plane mirror is rotated about an axis
perpendicular to plane of mirror then reflected ray
I1’ I1 I2’
image, spot do not rotate.
3. Velocity of image formed by a plane mirror: I2 y
y O x x

(2x+y) (2y+x)
(x oM,o) (o, o) (xIM,o) • Above figure shows image formed by object
placed at distance y, from M1 and at distance x
Xom co-ordinate of object relative to mirror from M2. Number of image formed by parallel
Xom co-ordinate of image relative to mirror plane mirrors is infinity.
Here, Xom = - Xom
dx IM dx • CASE 2:
Differentiating, = − OM (when the mirrors are inclined at angle θ)
dt dt
1. All the images formed by two mirrors lie on
⇒ v IM = − vOM circle having centre C. Here if angle between
⇒ velocity of image relative to mirror mirror is θ then image will formed on circle at
= – velocity of object relative to mirror. angle. If angle q is less number of image formed
will be more.
Example-02
Find velocity of image with respect to ground when
object and mirror both are moving towards each
other with velocity 2 m/s and 3 ms–1. How they are 2π-θ
θ
moving? C
Solution:
Here vOM = − v IM 2. If n is number of images, n then
v0 − v M =−(v I − v M ) ⇒ (+2 ms −1 ) − (−3ms −1 ) =− v I + (−3) 360
(a) =
n − 1 If
−8ms −1
⇒ vI = θ

aaa
3
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
 360
(i) is even. 7. FOCUS, FOCAL PLANE, CENTRE OF
θ
 CURVATURE, RADIUS OF CURVATURE
(ii) 360
is odd and object is kept symmetrically
 θ  Focus:

(b) If n = 
360 
 fractional number then only
 θ 
F f P
integral part is taken.
(c) n = 
360  F = Focus
 For all other conditions.
 θ 
f = Focal length
f
• Reflection at a spherical surface, paraxial and
marginal rays P F
• Spherical mirrors are part of polished spherical
surface
Concave
mirror • If paraxial rays are parallel to the axis of mirror
Convex
mirror they will meet or appear to meet at a point on
C
the axis, the point is known as focus and the
P R P distance between pole and focus is called focal
length
1. Center of curvature (C): Center of sphere of which
mirror is a part.  Focal plane:
2. Radius of curvature (R): Radius of sphere of Plane perpendicular to principal axis and passing
which mirror is a part. through focus is known as focal plane
3. Pole (P): Centre of mirror reflecting portion
4. Principal axis: Line which join pole to the centre F Primary focus
of curvature
5. Diameter of mirror: Shortest distance between two
ends of mirror.
F’ Secondary focus
 Concept of focus:
(i) Rays coming from primary focus will become
ii parallel after reflection.
S
2i h (ii) Parallel rays of light after reflection will meet at
C Q T P secondary focus.

 Centre of curvature:
SC It is the geometrical Centre of the mirror. If light
According to figure, cos i =
CQ ray passes or appear to pass through Centre of
curvature then, it retraces its path.
Here SC = R
2

So, CQ=
( R 2 ) ⇒ CQ= R C F P
cos i 2 cos i
R
h
Also, sin i =
R
When i → o, CQ = R and h → o and TC → PC P F C
2
 Paraxial Ray: R

Rays whose angle of incidence is small are R = Radius of curvature

known as paraxial rays.  Rules for image formation by spherical mirror
and ray diagram
 Marginal Ray:
1. (i) Rays parallel to principal axis passes through
Rays whose angle of incidence are not small are
focus.
known as marginal rays.

4
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
(ii) Rays passing through focus goes parallel to (−I) (− v) I v
⇒ = ⇒m= =−
principal axis. (+O) (−u) O u
MP
and =
β tan =
β
PC
C F
Substitute the value in equation (iii), we will get
M

i
γ

i
β α
P I C O
F

2. Ray passing through center of curvature returns in

same path.
1 1 2
+ =
C PO PI PC
Using, PO = − u, PI =− v and PC = −R
1 1 2
⇒ + =
3. In case of convex mirror for real object, image is (−u) (− v) (−R)
erect diminished virtual and between pole and 1 1 2
⇒ + =
focus Position v u R
 Sign Convention: 1 1 2 1 1 1
1. Pole is taken as origin and principal axis is taken ⇒ + = ⇒ + =
v u 2f v u f
as x-axis.
2. Direction of incident light is taken as direction of  Magnification (m):
+ve x-axis. height of image I
= m =
3. Object, focus, image are referred by their co- height of object O
ordinates.
Proof :
4. Height above principal axis is taken as positive.
∆PAB and ∆PA'B' are similar
v B
 Mirror Formula:
1 1 1 A’ I
+ = O
v u f P C A
1. Mirror formula holds only for paraxial rays. B’
u
2. Proof: (for point object and concave mirror)
In ∆ CMO β = i + α …. (i) A ' B ' AB A ' B ' PA '
   = ⇒ =
In ∆ CMI γ = i + β ….. (ii) PA ' PA AB PA
From eqn. (i) and (ii), (−I) (− v) I v
⇒ = ⇒m= = −
γ = (β − α ) + β (+O) (−u) O u
⇒ γ = 2β − α
⇒ α + γ = 2β …… (iii)
∴ α, β and γ are very small

aaa
5
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 1
Based On Reflection At Plane Surface 5. Two plane mirror M1 and M2 are placed parallel
to each other 20 cm apart. A luminous point
1. A ray of light is incident on a plane mirror along object ‘O’ is placed between them at 5 cm from
a vector ˆi + ˆj − kˆ . The normal to the mirror at the M1 as shown in figure.
point of incidence is along ˆi + ˆj . Then unit
vector along the reflected ray is.
(A)
3
(
1 ˆ ˆ ˆ
i + j+ k ) (B) −
1 ˆ ˆ ˆ
3
(
i + j+ k )
(C)
1
3
(
−ˆi − ˆj + kˆ ) (D) None

2. A point source has been placed as shown in the

figure. What is the length on the screen that will (A) The distance (in cm) of three nearest images
receive reflected light from the mirror? from mirror M1 are 5, 35 and 45
respectively.
(B) The distances (in cm) of three nearest image
from mirror M2 are 5, 35 and 45
respectively.
(C) The distance (in cm) of three nearest images
from mirror M1 are 15, 25 and
55respectively.
(D) The distances (in cm) of three nearest
(A) 2H (B) 3H images from mirror M2 are 15, 35 and 55
(C) H (D) None respectively.
3. A boy is walking under an inclined mirror at a 6. A beam of light strikes one mirror of a right
constant velocity V m/s along the X axis as angle mirror assembly at an angle of incidence
shown in figure. If the mirror is inclined at an 45º as shown in the figure. The right angle
angle θ with the horizontal then what is the mirror assembly is rotated such that the angle of
velocity of the image?
incidence becomes 60º. Which of the following
statements is (are) correct about the emerging
light beam.
Incident Original emerging
light beam light beam

45º
(A) V sin θi + Vcos θj
(B) V cos θi + V sin θj
(C) Vsin 2θi + Vcos2θj
(D) V cos 2θi+V sin 2θj. (A) It will move through an angle of 15º with
respect to the original emerging beam
4. A boy of height H is standing in front of a (B) It will move through an angle of 30º with
mirror, which has been fixed on the ground as respect to the original emerging beam
shown in figure. What length of his body can the (C) It will move through an angle of 45º with
boy see in the mirror? The length of the mirror respect to the original emerging beam
is (H/2) (D) It will emerge parallel to the original
emerging beam.
7. A person is standing in a room of width 200 cm.
A plane square mirror of length 10 cm is fixed
L on a wall in front of the person looks into the
mirror from distance 50 cm. How much width
(A) H (height) of the wall behind him will he be able to
(B) H2/(H2/L2)1/2 see.
(C) No image seen in the mirror (A) 30 cm (B) 40 cm
(D) 2H2/L (C) 50 cm (D) None of these

6
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
8. Sun rays are reflected from a horizontal mirror
and fall on a vertical screen. An object is placed
the mirror as shown in figure. If object is of
length h then length of the shadow on the screen
will be.

(A) 1º clockwise (B) 1º anticlockwise

h (C) 2º clockwise (D) 2º anticlockwise.
θ
Screen 13. Two plane mirror MN and PQ inclined at an
angle θ as shown in figure. O is a point source
(A) h (B) 2h (C) 3h (D) 4h 10 cm above the mirror MN. For light rays
9. A point source of light ‘S’ at a distance d from striking on the mirror MN directly from O not to
the screen A produces light intensity I0 at the strike the mirror PQ, the maximum value of θ is:
centre of the screen. If a completely reflecting O Q

mirror M is placed at a distance 2d behind the

source as shown in the figure, the intensity at the 10cm
centre of the screen changes to.
M A M
N P
8cm

s (A) 30° (B) 45°

(C) 60° (D) 75°
2d d 14. Area of triangle formed by S and its two images
is
(A) 25/26 I0 (B) 26/25 I0 S
(C) 24/25 I0 (D) 25/24 I0.
10. A plane mirror of length 8 cm is moving with 2m
speed 3 m/s towards a wall in situation as shown
in figure, than size of spot formed on the wall is. 120
0

Wall
S=Source of light
3 3 2
(A) 3 3 m2 (B) m
4
4
3m/s (C) m2 (D) Can't be determined
3 3

8cm 15. In the shown figure velocity of image with

(A) 8 cm (B) 4 cm (C) 16 cm (D) None respect to mirror?
11. Figure shows a square enclose. The inner 45 m/s
// ////////// // //////// /////////// ////////// /

surfaces are plane mirrors. A ray of light enters

a small hole in the centre of one mirror. At what
5m/s
angle q must be ray enter in order to exit
through the hole after being reflected one by
each mirrors?

(A) 50 m/s (B) 40 m/s

(C) 0 m/s (D) None of these
16. In the shown figure what is the value of
deviation?
/ //
// ///
///
///
(A) 15º (B) 30º (C) 45º (D) None // ///
/ //
///
12. A ray of light strikes a plane mirror at an angle // /// 20°
///
of incidence 45º as shown in the figure. After ///
// ///
reflection, the ray passes through a prism of // ///
///
refractive index 1.50, whose apex angle is 4º. // ///
/ // /
The angle through which the mirror should be
rotated if the total deviation of the ray is to be (A) 40° (B) 140° (C) 80° (D) None
90º is.
aaa
7
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
17. If θ=110° then total number of images formed 24. A plane mirror is inclined at an angle θ with the
by the mirror system will be horizontal surface. At t = 0 a particle is projected
from point P as shown in figure with a velocity v
at an angle α with the horizontal. Path of the
image as observed from the frame of the particle
is

\\
\\\
\\\
\\\
\\\
\\\
\\\
\\\
\\\
\\\
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5

\\\
v

\\\
18. A plane mirror approaches a stationary person

\\\
θ

\\\
with acceleration 10 ms–2. The acceleration of

\\\
\\\
his image as seen by the person, will be P
(A) 10 ms–2 (B) 20 ms–2 (A) Parabola (B) Straight line
–2
(C) 5 ms (D) can't determined
(C) Circle (D) None of these
19. Two infinitely long plane mirrors are placed 25. A boy of TA3 batch is 1.8m tall and can see his
along x and y–axis, facing towards Ist quadrant. image in a plane mirror fixed on a wall. His eyes
An object starts from (1, 2, 0) with a velocity of are 1.6m from the floor level. The minimum
v ( 2iˆ + 2 ˆj ) ms −1 . The magnitude of relative length of the mirror to see his full image is–
velocities of primary images is: (A) 0.9 m (B) 0.85 m
(A) 8 ms–1 (B) 4 ms–1 (C) 0.8 m (D) Can't be determined
(C) 4 2 ms −1 (D) none of these 26. Two plane mirrors are parallel to each other and
spaced 20 cm apart. An object is kept in between
20. A point object approaches a plane mirror with a
them at 15 cm from A. Out of the following at
speed of 10 ms–1, while the image recedes away which point (s) image (s) is/are not formed in
from the mirror with a speed of 6 ms–1. The mirror A (distance measured from mirror A) –
direction and magnitude of the velocity of mirror is (A) 15 cm (B) 25 cm (C) 45 cm (D) 55 cm
(A) Towards the object, 8 ms–1
(B) Towards the image, 6 ms–1 27. Sun rays are reflected from a horizontal mirror
(C) Away from the object, 8 ms–1 and fall on a vertical screen. An belong object is
(D) Away from the object, 2 ms–1 placed perpendicular to mirror at large distance
from the screen. If object is of length 'h' then
21. A person has D cm wide face and his two eyes length of the shadow on the screen of image will
are separated by d cm. The minimum width of a be
mirror required for the person to view his
complete face is
D+d D−d
(A) (B)
2 4 h
D+d D−d
(C) (D)
4 2
(A) h (B) 2h (C) 3h (D) ∞
22. An object in a lift is dropped freely and
simultaneously, the lift having a plane mirror at 28. An object is moving with a velocity of
its floor is operated. The lift starts ascending 2iˆ + 3jˆ + 6kˆ . A plane mirror whose reflecting
with an acceleration a. If the velocity of the surface is parallel to y-z plane is moving with a
image relative to the object be 40 ms–1 upwards,
after 1 second. The value of a in ms–2 will be: velocity of ˆi + ˆj + kˆ . What is the velocity of
(g = 10 ms–2) image as seen by a stationary observer?
(A) 2 (B) 10 (C) 5 (D) None (A) ˆj + 4kˆ (B) 3jˆ + 6kˆ
23. A cubical room is formed with six plane (C) −ˆj − 4kˆ (D) −ˆi + 3jˆ + 6kˆ
mirrors. An insect moves along the diagonal of
the floor with uniform speed. The component of 29. An insect of negligible mass is sitting on a
velocities of its image in two adjacent walls block of mass M, tied with a spring of force
along the respective walls are 20 2 cm/s, then constant k. The block performs simple harmonic
the velocity of the image formed by the roof, is- motion with amplitude A in front of a plane
(A) 20 cm/s (B) 40 cm/s mirror placed as shown. The maximum speed of
(C) 20 2 cm/s (D) 10 2 cm/s insect relative to its image will be

8
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
1 1 1 3
(A) tan −1   s (B) tan −1   s
4π  3 4π 4
1 3
(C) tan −1   s (D) None of these
60° 8π 4
33. A plane mirror OA of length 2 m is kept along
the line y = –x as shown in the figure. An insect
having velocity of 4iˆ cm/s is moving along the
k A 3 k x-axis from far away. The time span for which
(A) A (B)
M 2 M the insect can see its image will be
y
k A k
(C) A 3 (D) A
M 2 M

\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
30. The man, whose height is 1.75 m is standing at a

\\\\
\\\
\\\\
distance 6m from a vertical pillar of height h = 7

\\\\
\\\
m. At what distance from the man should we put a

\\
\\\\
x

\\
small flat mirror on the ground horizontally to see O
in it the image of the top of the pillar? (A) 50 sec (B) 25 sec
(A) 4.8 m (B) 1.2 m (C) 5.2 m (D) 4.2 m (C) 25 2 sec (D) 50 2 sec
31. Three plane mirrors are arranged so that they are 34. AB is a man of height 2 m and M is a mirror of
mutually perpendicular as shown in figure. Let length 0.5 m and mass 0.1kg. Initially M and A are
the line of intersection of the mirrors be the at the same level and the M starts falling freely
coordinate axes. A ray OP represented by vector always remaining vertical. If the level of the eyes

r1 = ( x1 , y1 , z1 ) is reflected from the mirror. of the man is 1.5 cm below, the time after which
the man sees the reflection of his feet is
Which of the following statement is incorrect?
z _________ sec. [g = 10 m/s2]
A
r4 r3 M

y
O r2
r1
P
B
x (A) 0.10 (B) 0.20 (C) 0.16 (D) 0.32
(A) The components of the reflected vector from 35. In the diagram shown, the object is performing

mirror in x-y plane= is r2 ( x1 , y1 , −z1 ) SHM according to the equation y = 2A sin (ωt)
 and the plane mirror is performing SHM
(B) If r2 is now reflected at the y-z plane, the
π
components of the reflected vector is according to the equation Y =−A sin  ωt −  .
  3
r3 = ( − x1 , y1 , −z1 ) The diagram shows the state of the object and the

(C) If r3 is reflected at the z-x plane, the mirror at time t = 0 sec. The minimum time
components of the reflected vector is from t = 0 sec after which the velocity of the

r4 =−( x1 , − y1 , −z1 ) image becomes equal to zero?
plane mirror
(D) For an incident ray that is reflected from the
mirrors in some other order, the components object

of final ray r4 will change.
32. Figure shows a plane mirror along the X-Z plane
and a fixed point object P (8m, 6m) on the X-Y
plane. If the mirror rotates anticlockwise about the π 3π π 2π
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Z-axis with a speed of 2 rad/sec, then the time after 3ω ω 6ω 3ω
which the image will be on X-axis is 36. Rear window of a car has a size of 120 × 45
Y
cm2. The driver sits at a distance L = 2m from
the rear window. What should be the minimum
size of flat mirror, hanging at a distance of 0.5 m
P(8m,6m) in front of the driver so that he has best view of
road situation behind the car?
(A) (24 cm × 9 cm) (B) (30cm × 11.25 cm)
X (C) (40 cm × 15 cm) (D) (20 cm × 7.5 cm)
O

aaa
9
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
37. A particle of mass m is moving in yz-plane with 41. The area of triangle formed by 3 primary images
a uniform velocity v as shown in figure. It is:
M
collides elastically with the wall AB. The 2
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
change in its angular momentum about the
origin as it bounces elastically from the wall. L/2
z O
B

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
M1 M3
45°
3 2 L2
a v (A) L (B) L2 (C) (D) 3 L2
A 2 2
y Based On Reflection At Curved Surface
42. A concave mirror is placed on a horizontal table,
(A) mvaiˆ (B) 2mvaiˆ
with its axis directed vertically upwards. Let O
(C) 0 (D) 2mvaiˆ be the pole of the mirror and C its centre of
38. A point source of light is placed in front of a curvature. A point object is placed at C. It has a
plane mirror as shown in the figure. Determine real image, also located at C. If the mirror is
the length of reflected patch of light on the now filled with water, the image will be
screen Σ:- (A) Real and will remain at C
S (B) Real and located at a point between C and ∞
(C) Virtual and located at a point between C and O
L
(D) Real and located at a point between C and O.
L L 43. The incorrect statement for a concave mirror
producing a virtual image of the object is.
(A) The linear magnification is always greater
L
than one, except at the pole.
Σ (B) The linear magnification is always less than
3L L one.
(A) L (B) 2L (C) (D)
2 2 (C) The magnification tends to one as the object
39. A point object O can move along vertical line moves nearer to the pole of the mirror.
AB as shown in figure. When image of the (D) The distance of the object from the pole of
object is first visible to D then it is released at t the mirror is less than the focal length of
= 0 from rest from A. The time for which object mirror
is visible to D is: 44. A linear object is placed along the axis of a
A
O
mirror as shown in figure. If ‘f’ is the focal
length of the mirror then the length of image is.

L D L
2 2

3/2f
vertical plane
mirror B

6L 2L 2f
(A) (B)
g g (A) (2f)/3 (B) f (C) f / 3 (D) None
45. The co-ordinates of image of point object P
3L formed after two successive reflection in
(C) (D) t → ∞
g situation as shown in figure considering first
reflection at concave mirror and then at convex.
40. A plane mirror of length 8cm is moving with f2=20cm
Y
speed 3m/s towards a wall in situation as shown f1=15cm
in figure. Then rate of change of size of spot P P2
formed on the wall is 2mm
4cm O
wall X
P1
20cm
S = source M2
3 m/ s

of light
M1
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ 50cm
(A) (30 cm, – 14 mm) (B) (– 30 cm, 14 mm)
8 cm
(C) (– 30 cm, – 14 mm) (D) None
(A) 8 cm/s (B) 4 cm/s (C) 16 cm/s (D) 0

10
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
46. A concave mirror forms an image I 51. An object is kept between centre of curvature C
corresponding to a point object O. x-axis is and focus F image will be formed
along the principle axis of the mirror. The
equation of the circle intercepted by the xy plane
on the mirror is
y

O
(-50,4)
x
I
(25,-1) (A) Between F & C (B) Between C and ∞
(C) Between F and P (D) None of these
(A) x2 + y2 = 1600 52. If x and y denote the distances of the object and
(B) x2 + y2–20x – 1600 = 0 image from the focus of a concave mirror. The
(C) x2 + y2–20x – 1500 = 0 line y = 4x cuts the graph at a point whose
(D) x2 + y2–20x + 1500 = 0 abscissa is 20 cm. The focal length of the mirror
47. A luminous point object is moving along the is
y
principal axis of a concave mirror of focal length
12 cm towards it. When its distance from the
mirror is 20 cm its velocity is 4 cm/s. The
velocity of the image in cm/s at that instant is
(A) 6, towards the mirror x
(B) 6, away from the mirror (A) 20 cm (B) 40 cm
(C) 9, away from the mirror (C) 30 cm (D) can't be determined
(D) 9, towards the mirror 53. A marginal ray is falling on a concave spherical
48. A particle is dropped along the axis from a mirror as shown in figure. The ratio of
f longitudinal (x) and transverse (y) spherical
height on a concave mirror of focal length f as
2 aberration is
shown in figure. The maximum speed of image
is
t=0 30°
30°
F x
h=f/ 2 g
C
// // /
////
/
y
//// ////
///// ///// ///////////// ////
////

3 3
(A) ∞ 3fg (C)
(B) 3fg (D) None 1
4 2 (A) 3 (B)
49. In the diagram shown the velocity of image will 3
be along 2
(C) (D) Can't be determined
3
54. Three plane mirrors are placed such that the
angle between the first and second or between
the second and third is the same, say θ. A light
striking the first mirror, after reflection at the
three mirrors emerges opposite to the initial
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S
direction. The value of is
50. A ray incident on a convex mirror at its pole. π π 2π π
The mirror is rotates with constant angular (A) (B) (C) (D)
3 6 3 2
velocity ω in anticlockwise direction about an 55. A light ray travelling parallel to the principal
axis perpendicular to the plane of paper passing axis of a concave mirror strikes the mirror at
through pole P. Angular velocity with which angle of incidence θ. If radius of curvature of
reflected ray rotated about the pole. the mirror is R, then after reflection, the ray
meets the principle axis at distance d from the
centre of curvature, then d is
(B) R 1 −
R 1 
(A) 
2  2cos θ
(A) ω clockwise (B) ω anticlockwise R R
(C) (D) (1 + cos θ)
(C) 2ω clockwise (D) 2ω anticlockwise 2cos θ 2

aaa
11
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
56. Figure shows a concave mirror with its 61. Two rays are incident on a spherical mirror of
principal axis parallel to x–axis and focus on the radius R=5 cm parallel to its optical axis
y–axis. The centre of curvature is at (–108 cm, perpendicular at distances 0.5 cm and 3 cm.
54 cm). The coordinates of the image of a point From the principal axis. The distance ∆x
between the points at which these rays intersect
source A (81 cm, 48 cm) will be
the optical axis after being reflected at the
y mirror is:
(A) Zero as the two rays will meet at focus
(B) 0.6 cm (C) 0.31 cm (D) 0.42 cm
62. You are given a parabolic mirror whose inner
x surface is silvered. The equation of the curve
(A) (144 cm, 46 cm) (B) (144 cm, 62 cm) formed by its intersection with x–y plane is
given by y= x2/4. A ray travelling in x–y plane
(C) (36 cm, 8 cm) (D) None of these
along line y= x+3 hits the mirror in second
57. An object is placed in front of a convex mirror quadrant and gets reflected. The unit vector in
at a distance of 50 cm. A plane mirror is the direction of reflected ray is :
y
introduced between object and convex mirror
covering the lower half of the convex mirror. If
the distance between the object and the plane
mirror is 30 cm, it is found that there is no gap
between the images formed by the two mirrors.
x
The radius of the convex mirror is:
(A) 12.5 cm(B) 25 cm (C) 50 cm (D) 100 cm
58. A point object O is going towards concave
mirror as shown in the figure. Choose the
(A)
1
2
( −iˆ − ˆj ) (B)
1
2
( iˆ + ˆj )
correct option representing direction of velocity
of the image (F is the focus and C is the centre
(C)
1
2
( −iˆ + ˆj ) (D) None of these

of curvature) 63. A ray of light is incident on a convex mirror along

a vector 3iˆ + 4 ˆj + 12kˆ . The normal to the convex
O
mirror on incidence point is along 3iˆ + 4 ˆj . The
F C unit vector along the reflected ray is:–
(A) 1 ( −3iˆ + 4ˆj − 12kˆ ) (B) 1 ( −3iˆ − 4ˆj + 12kˆ )
13 13
(A) (B)
(C) ( 3i + 4 j + 12kˆ ) (D) None
1 ˆ ˆ
(C) (D) 13
64. A beam of convergent light converges to a point
0.5 m in front of the mirror after reflection at a
59. A concave mirror of focal length f is separated convex mirror but in the absence of the mirror
by a plane mirror facing the former by a distance the beam converges to a point 0.2 m behind the
if 3.6f. Find where should a point source be kept mirror. The radius of curvature of the mirror is:
on their common axis, so that the real image 0.5m
coincides with the object.
(A) 1.2 f from plane mirror P
I O
(B) 2.4 f from plane mirror
(C) 1.8 f from plane mirror 0.2m
(D) None of these
(A) 20 cm (B) 50 cm
60. In the figure shown, the speed of image with
(C) 66.67 cm (D) 28.57 cm
respect to mirror is: 65. The co-ordinates of the image of point object P
formed by a concave mirror of radius of
15 m/ s
f=15cm curvature 20 cm (consider paraxial rays only) as
37° shown in the figure is:-
y
// P
////// ////////

15cm
(40cm, 3cm)
///

O x
(A) 3 m/s (B) 4.5 m/s
/
///

(C) 5.41 m/s (D) 29.25 m/s /

12
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
(A) (13.33 cm, – 1 cm) 1
68. For a concave mirror, graph of 2 and u for
(B) (13.33 cm, + 1 cm) v
(C) (– 13.33 cm, + 1 cm) b
(D) (– 13.33 cm, – 1 cm) real object is drawn. What is the value of
a
66. The graph shows the variation of v with change 1/v
2

in u for a mirror. Points plotted above the point

P on the curve are for values of v (0,a)
v
(0,b)
u
(-R, 0)
P
45°
u 1 1
(A) (B)
(A)Smaller than f (B) smaller than 2f 4 2
(C) Larger than 2f (D) larger than f 1 1
(C) (D)
67. A small square object is placed between centre 2 8
of curvature and focus of concave mirror as
shown in figure. What will be the correct shape 69. In the figure shown a thin parallel beam of light
of image. is incident on a plane mirror m1 at small angle
‘q’. m2 is a concave mirror of focal length ‘f’.
\\\\
\\\\\\

After three successive reflections of this beam

\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

C F the x and y coordinates of the image is:

y
\ \\\
\\
\\\\
\\\\\\

θ
\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

(A) O
C F x
\ \\\

m2 m1
\\

d
\\\\
\\\\\\
\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

(B) (A) x = f – d, y = fθ
C F (B) x = d + f , y = fθ
(C) x = f – d, y = – fθ
\ \\\
\\

(D) x = d – f , y = – fθ
\\\\
\\\\\\
\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

(C) C F
\ \\\
\\\\
\\\\\\ \\
\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

(D) C F
\ \\\
\\

aaa
13
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 2
One or More Than One Correct Answer 6. Two plane mirrors are placed parallel to each
Question other and 40 cm apart. An object is placed 10
Type Questions
cm from one mirror. The distances from the
1. A plane mirror M is arranged parallel to a wall object to the image for each of the five images
W at a distance from it. The light produced by a that are closest to the object, are OI1, OI2, OI3,
point source S kept on the wall is reflected by OI4 and OI5 respectively. then -
the mirror and produces a light spot on the wall. (A) OI1 = 20 cm (B) OI2 = 40 cm
The mirror moves with velocity n towards the (C) OI3 = 80 cm (D) OI5 = 100 cm
wall. Then. 7. A ray of light is incident along a vector
(A) The spot of light will move with the speed n
ˆi + ˆj − kˆ on a plane mirror lying in y–z plane.
on the wall.
(B) The spot of light will not move on the wall. The unit vector along the reflected ray can be
(C) As the mirror comes closer, the spot of light iˆ + ˆj − kˆ iˆ − ˆj + kˆ
(A) (B)
will becomes larger and shift ways from the 3 3
wall with speed larger then n. −i + ˆj − kˆ
ˆ 3i + ˆj − kˆ
ˆ
(C) (D)
(D) The size of the light spot on the wall remains 3 3
the same. 8. A plane mirror and an object has speeds of 5ms–1
2. A plane mirror reflecting a ray of incidence light and 10ms–1 respectively. If the motion of mirror
is rotated through an angle θ about an axis and object is along the normal of the mirror then
through the point of incidence in the plane of the the speed of image may be:–
mirror perpendicular to the plane of incidence, (A) 0 ms–1 (B) 10 ms–1
–1
then - (C) 20ms (D) 25 ms–1
(A) The reflected ray does not rotate 9. The drawing shows a top view of a square room.
(B) The reflected ray rotates through an angle θ One wall is missing and the other three are each
(C) The reflected ray rotates through an angle 2θ mirrors. From point P in the center of the open
(D) The incident ray is fixed side, a laser is fired, with the intent of hitting a
small target located at the center of one wall.
3. The image of an extended object, placed Identify vector in whose direction the laser can
perpendicular to the principal axis of a mirror, be fired and score a hit, assuming that the light
will be erect if does not strike any mirror more than one.
///////////////////
(A) The object and the image are both real
//////////////////////////
///////////////////////

(B) The object and the image are both virtual

Target
(C) The object is real but the image is virtual
y
(D) The object is virtual but the image is real.
P x
4. Two points P and Q lie on either side of an axis
XY as shown. It is desired to produce an image î ĵ
(A) + ĵ (B) ˆi + ˆj (C) −ˆi + ˆj (D) −î +
of P and Q using a spherical mirror, with XY as 3 3
the optic axis. The mirror must be 10. A point object is kept at (1, 0, 0). A circular
plane mirror of radius 1 m is kept in yz-plane
P
x x such that its centre is at the origin. The
Left
Q Right reflecting side faces positive x-axis. At which of
(A) Concave (B) Convex the following points can be image of the object
seen?
(C) Positioned to the left of P
(A) (– 0.5, 0, 0.5) (B) (2, 2, 2)
(D) Positioned to the right of Q. (C) (1, 1.5, –1.5) (D) (1, – 1, 1.5)
11. A particle is moving along a circle with a
5. Two mirror's are inclined at an angle of 30° one
constant speed u, as shown in figure. M is a
of the ray is incident parallel to the one of the plane mirror, then
mirror. Then select the correct statement(s)-
(A) Ray will undergo five reflections from the P

system θ
(B) Total deviation from the system will 120° B

(C) Ray will retrace it path finally

(D) Total deviation suffered by the ray will be A u
M
90°

14
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
(A) Relative velocity of image w.r.t. object 15. Select correct alternative(s)
becomes zero twice in one revolution (A) For two positions of object, a concave mirror
(B) Path of image with respect to object is circle can form enlarged image
(C) Path of image with respect to object is (B) In the paraxial ray assumption, spherical
straight line mirror acts as a parabolic mirror
(D) Speed of image with respect to object when (C) Apparent shift produced by a slab is always
particle is at P is 2u sinθ occur in the direction of light
(D) The deviation produced by a thin prism is
12. A boy of height 1.5 m with his eye level at 1.4
independent of the angle of incidence
m stands before a plane mirror of length 0.75 m
16. A convex mirror and a concave mirror are
fixed on the wall. The height of the lower edge
placed on the same optic axis, separated by
of the mirror above the floor is 0.8 m. Then:
distance L = 20 cm. The radius of
(A) The boy will see his full image
curvature of each mirror has a magnitude of 12
(B) The boy can’t see his hair
cm. A light source is located at a distance x
(C) The boy can’t see his feet
from the concave mirror as shown in figure.
(D) The boy will see his hair

\\\\

\\\\
13. A plane mirror is placed in the Y-Z plane; a

\\\ \\

\\\ \\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\
point object is moving in a circular path of x

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
radius 3m and centre (4, 3, 0) in x-y plane, with S

\\\\\\\\\\
variable angular velocity given by ω =t

\\\\\

\\\\\
\\\\

\\\\
(rad/sec).
y (A) The rays from the source return to the source
ω=t after reflecting first from the convex mirror
and then from the concave mirror for x = 8
(4,3,0) cm.
x (B) The rays from the source return to the source
A
after reflecting first from the convex mirror
and then from the concave mirror for x = 16
cm.
(A) At time 5π , the relative velocity of object
(C) If the rays from the source return to the
with respect to the image will be zero for the
source after first reflecting from the concave
third time.
mirror and then from the convex mirror for x
(B) At time π , the relative velocity of object = 8 cm.
with respect to the image will be zero for the (D) If the rays from the source return to the
third time. source after first reflecting from the concave
(C) The line joining object and image is always mirror and then from the convex mirror for x
perpendicular to the mirror. = 16 cm.
(D) The line joining object and image is
17. An object of length 1 cm is placed on a principle
perpendicular to the mirror at time n π axis of an equiconvex lens of radii 5 cm.
only (where n is integer). Distance between the lens and object is 20 cm.
14. The mirror of length L moves horizontally as Space between the lens and object is filled with
shown in the figure with a velocity v. The mirror medium of two different refractive index 2 and
1, lens being placed in the medium of refractive
is illuminated by a point source of light ‘P’
placed on the ground. index 1. Boundary of both medium is mid-way
between the object and lens as shown in figure.

L V
1cm µ=2 µ=1 µ=1
1.5
P
10cm 10cm
wall
(A) The rate at which the length of the light spot
(A) The image will be formed at distance of 7.5
on the ground increases is zero.
cm from the optical centre
(B) Front edge of light spot moves with speed 2v.
(B) The image will be formed at distance of 20/3
(C) Width of light spot on ground disc eases
cm from the optical centre
with time
(C) The size of the image is 0.5 cm
(D) Intensity of light spot remains unchanged
(D) The size of the image is 0.4 cm

aaa
15
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
18. Choose the correct statement(s). Passage # 2 (Q. 23 to Q.25)
(A) Concave mirror cannot form erect magnified A plane mirror is placed in the Y-Z plane; a point
image of an object placed in front of it. object is moving in a circular path of radius 3m and
(B) Concave mirror can form inverted magnified centre (4, 3, 0) in x-y plane, with variable angular
image of an object placed in front of it. velocity given by ω =t (rad/sec).
y
(C) Convex mirror cannot form real image of an
object placed in front of it. ω=t
(D) Convex mirror cannot form magnified image
of an object placed in front of it. (4,3,0)

19. For a concave mirror, graph of square of x

A
magnification and image distance from pole is
given for real object. Choose the correct
statement(s).
m 2
23. At what time t, the relative velocity of object
with respect to the image will be zero for the
third time
a
b
(A) π sec (B) 5π sec
c
v(in cm)
15 30 60 (C) 3π sec (D) 7π sec
(A) This graph is hyperbola. 24. At what time the line joining object and image
(B) Length a must be equal to length b. will be perpendicular to the mirror
(C) Radius of concave mirror is 60 cm (A) π sec (B) 2π sec
(D) The length c will be half of length a. (C) 0 sec (D) Always
Question Passage Based Type Questions 25. What is the minimum angle between the line
joining origin and the image with the mirror?
Passage # 1 (Q. 20 to Q. 22) (A) 16º (B) 45º (C) 32º (D) 135º
An observer is projected with velocity v0 in upward
direction in uniform gravitational field as shown in Passage # 3 (Q. 26 to Q. 28)
figure. [Acceleration due to gravity =g] A ray of light travelling with a speed c leaves point 1
shown in figure and is reflected to point 2. The ray
strikes the reflecting surface at a distance x from
v02 point 1. According to Fermat's principle of least time,
8g v0 among all possible paths between two points, the one
object actually taken by a ray of light is that for which the
time taken is the least (In fact there are some cases in
d d observer
which the time taken by a ray is maximum rather than
20. Find out the time when image of object a minimum).
disappears for the observer for first time. 1 3 2
2v0 3v
(A) (B) 0
3g 4g Y1 Y2
θ 1 θ2
v
(C) 0 (D) None of these x
2g

21. What is the fraction of time of complete motion,
for which observer will not observe object’s 26. Find the time for the ray to reach from point 1 to
image? point 2.
1 1 Y12 + x 2 + ( − x ) + Y22
2
(A) (B) (A)
4 3
c
1 
(C) (D) None of these (B)
2 c
22. Find the maximum height for which observer Y Y 2x
will observe its own image. (C) 1 + 2 (D)
c c c
v2 v2
(A) 0 (B) 0
8g 4g 27. Under what condition is time taken least?
3v 2
v2
(A) θ1 =θ2 (B) x=  − x
(C) 0 (D) 0 (C) Y1=Y2 (D) all of these
8g 2g

16
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
28. Which of the following statement is in 34. Maximum distance between object and image.
accordance with Fermat's principle (A) 14 (B) 10
(A) A ray as it moves from one point to another (C) 6 (D) None of these
after reflection takes shortest possible path
(B) A ray as it moves from one point to another Passage # 6 (Q. 35 to Q. 37)
after reflection takes longest possible path Whenever an object is placed between the two mirror's
(C) A ray as it moves from one point to another at an angle θ on its bisector. It forms several images
takes shortest possible time which lies on a circle of radius equal to the distance
(D) A ray as it moves from one point to another between the vertex of mirror and the vertex
takes longest possible time
Passage # 4 (Q. 29 to Q. 31)
A plain mirror and an object is placed as shown in x
figure. If ( x, y )= (1, 3), θ= 30°
y 35. Draw graph between the area formed by joining
all the images and object and the distance
(x,y) between the vertex and object
y
θ

Area

Area
(A) (B)
x x

29. The co-ordinate of image is-

y y
(A) (2 3,1/ 2) ) (B) (−2 3, − 3)
(C) (–2,0) (D) (− 3 / 2,1/ 2)
(C) (D)
x
30. If mirror is rotating anticlockwise as shown with
an angular velocity 2rad/s find the velocity of
object with respect to mirror by which it is
going away from mirror when mirror makes an 36. If the angle between the two mirror is 60°. Find
angle 30° from vertical?
(A) 2m/s (B) 3m/s the area of regular polygon bounded by the
(C) 1m/s (D) 1.5 m/s images and the object
31. Relative velocity between object and image at
this instant. (A)
(
x2 4 3 + 1 ) (B)
 4 3 +1
  x
(A) 4m/s (B) 6m/s 4  4 
(C) 2m/s (D) None of these
3 3x 2 5 3x 2
(C) (D)
Passage # 5 (Q. 32 to Q. 34) 2 4
A plane mirror is placed along the y axis and a particle 37. If an object is placed between more than two
is moving in a circular motion, whose centre is (5,3) mirrors then the locus of a point going through
and radius 2m. The velocity of particle is π m/s. all the images and object will be
(A) Equation of sphere
(5,3) (B) Family of concentric circle
2m (C) Family of a circle passing through one
−1
π ms t=0 common point
(D) None of these
32. Find out the time when magnitude of velocity of
image w.r.t. object will be minimum for the first Passage # 7 (Q. 38 to Q. 40)
time: A man of height H is standing above the reflecting
(A) 0.5 sec (B) 1 sec surface of an inclined plane mirror at an angle θ from
(C) 2 sec (D) None of these horizontal as shown. The vertical separation between
man and inclined plane is x.
33. Find out coordinate of image when magnitude Man can see his complete image in length
of velocity of separation of object and image is
maximum. H ( H + x ) sin θ
of mirror.
(A) (–5,1) (B) (–5,5) H + 2x
(C) (–3,3) (D) (–7,3) (Given : x = H = 1m and θ = 45°)

aaa
17
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
Passage # 9 (Q. 44 to Q. 46)
H
For the given system of blocks and a concave mirror
answer the following. (Assuming A, B & C are very
small). Focal length of mirror is 20 cm.
y

\\
\\\\
\\\\
x A B

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
θ x
o

\\\
\\\\\\\
38. If man starts moving with velocity √2 ms–1 C 8m/ s

\\\\
\\\\
along inclined plane, find out length of mirror at
44. Velocity of A when C is moving down with a
t = 1s in which he can see his
velocity 8 ms–1, is
complete image.
(A) 4 m/s (B) 8 m/s
2 2 (C) 12 m/s (D) 16 m/s
(A) m (B) m
3 3 45. If A is at x= 30 cm then it's image will be at
1 1 (A) x = – 40 (B) x = – 60
(C) m (D) m (C) x = –20 (D) x = 60
3 3 2
46. Velocity of image of A when it is at x= 30 cm is
39. If man starts moving with velocity 1 ms–1 along
(A) 12 ˆi m/s (B) −12 ˆi m/s
vertical, find out length of mirror at t = 1s in
which he can see his complete image. (C) 48 ˆi m/s (D) − 48 ˆi m/s
3 Passage # 10 (Q. 47 to Q. 49)
3 2
(A) m (B) m An object is present on the principal axis of a concave
10 5 mirror at a distance 30 cm from it. Focal length of
3 3 mirror is 20 cm.
(C) (D) m

\\\
5 2 5

\
\\\\
\\\\
If man starts moving with velocity 1 ms–1

\\\\\\\
40. O

\\\\\\\\\\\\ \
horizontally, find out length of mirror at t = 1s
in which he can see his complete image.

\\\ \\
\\\\
1

\ \\\
(A) √2 m (B) m 30cm
2 47. Image formed by mirror is
(A) At a distance 60 cm in front of mirror
1
(C) m (D) 2 2 m (B) At a distance 60 cm behind the mirror
2 2 (C) At a distance 12 cm in front of mirror
(D) At a distance 12 cm behind the mirror.
Passage # 8 (Q. 41 to Q.43)
The figure shows time varying angle θ which is given
48. If object starts moving with 2 cms–1 along
by equation θ = (2 + 6t2). The mirror is rotating about a principal axis towards the mirror then,
horizontal axis in clockwise direction. (A) Image starts moving with 8 cms–1 away
Object from the mirror
(at rest)
(B) Image starts moving with 8 cms–1 towards
5m the mirror
(C) Image starts moving with 4 cms–1 towards
y the mirror
θ (D) Image starts moving with 4 cms–1 away from
x
(-2,0) (0,0) the mirror
49. If object starts moving with 2 cms–1
41. Locus of the image is :- perpendicular to principal axis above the
(A) x2 + y2 = 52 (B) (x + 2)2 + y2 = 52 principal axis then,
(C) (x – 2) + y = 5 (D) x2 + (y – 2)2 = 52
2 2 2
(A) Image moves with velocity 4 cms–1 below
the principal axis
42. Angular velocity of the image at t = 2 s : (B) Image moves with velocity 4 cms–1 above
(A) 12 rad/s (B) 24 rad/s the principal axis
(C) 36 rad/s (D) 48 rad/s (C) Image moves with velocity 8 cms–1 below
the principal axis
43. Velocity of the image at t = 1 s:- (D) Image moves with velocity 8 cms–1 above
(A) 20 m/s (B) 40 m/s the principal axis
(C) 60 m/s (D) 120 m/s

18
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
Passage # 11 (Q. 50 to Q. 52) 55. Find the Y coordinate of a point placed at
A point object starts moving in a circle of radius 1mm, centre of curvature if the mirror of
with a constant angular acceleration of 1 rad/s2, in a focal length 'f' is rotated by an angle of π/50.
plane perpendicular to the principal axis at a distance π π
20 cm from the pole of a concave mirror of focal (A) − f (B) f
25 25
length 25 cm. At time t =2s after the motion starts 3π 3π
(C) f (D) − f
50 50

x Passage # 13 (Q. 56 to Q. 58)

20cm In the given figure an object is kept on the principal
axis of a concave mirror in front of it. Magnification of
image is found – 2/3 at this position. Now mirror is
50. The ratio of acceleration of image and the object is shifted towards the object keeping object fixed, by
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 25 amount 10 cm. At this new position distance of
51. Angle rotated by the image is object from mirror becomes same as the distance of
(A) 2 rad (B) 4 rad image from the mirror before displacing the mirror.
(C) 10 rad (D) 50 rad

\\\\\
\\\\\\\
52. Magnitude of relative velocity of object w.r.t.

\\\\\\\
image

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
(A) 2mms–1 (B) 5 mms–1
–1
(C) 8 mms (D) 10 mms–1
Passage # 12 (Q. 53 to Q. 55)

\\\\\\\
\\\
A particle is situated on the principal axis of a concave
mirror at a distance d' from the pole. Now a small 56. Distance of object from mirror before displacing
angular displacement is given to the mirror in the the mirror is
anticlockwise direction about pole. (A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm
y
y (C) 30 cm (D) 40 cm
\\\\\
\ \\\\\\

57. Focal length of the mirror is

\\\\\\\\\\\\

object
(fixed) P (A) 6 cm (B) 8 cm
x
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

(C) 10 cm (D) 12 cm
x
\\\\\\\

58. Magnification at the new position of mirror is

\\\\\

53. Graph between the "y–coordinate of image" and 3

(A) − (B) – 3
the angular displacement of the mirror 2
(Considering new principal axis as x–axis.) 1
fd 2 (C) – 2 (D) –
(A) Straight line of slope 3
(f + d)
2

f 2d
(B) Straight line of slope
(f − d)
2

fd
(C) Straight line of slope
f −d
fd
(D) Straight line of slope
(f + d)
2

54. Two graphs have been plotted for the two

different mirrors between d and 1/m. Select the
correct relation (where d is distance of object
and m is magnification)
1
m
fB
fA

d
(A) fA > fB (B) fB > fA
(C) fA = fB (D) Incomplete information

aaa
19
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 3
2m/ s
Question Matrix Match Type Questions
1. A plane mirror is placed in x–z plane with its
reflecting surface facing towards negative y–axis. 3m/ s
The mirror is moving parallel to positive x–axis y
with a speed of 5 m/s. A point object P is moving
in front of the mirror with a velocity x
( 3m / s ) ˆi + ( 4m / s ) ˆj + ( 5m / s ) kˆ . Column – I Column –II
Column–I (A) Speed of image w.r.t. ground (P) 10 m/s
(A) Velocity of image (B) Speed of image w.r.t. mirror (Q) 5 m/s
(B) Velocity of image w.r.t. mirror (C) Speed of image w.r.t. object (R) 14 m/s
(C) Velocity of image w.r.t. object (D) Speed of mirror w.r.t. object (S) 7 m/s
(D) Velocity of object w.r.t. mirror
Column–II 4. Angle between two mirrors ‘θ’ and location of
object is given in column I and some possible
(P) ( −2m / s ) ˆi + ( 4m / s ) ˆj + ( 5m / s ) kˆ
number of images are given in column II.
(Q) ( −8m / s ) ˆj
(R) ( 3m / s ) ˆi + ( −4m / s ) ˆj + ( 5m / s ) kˆ
(S) ( −2m / s ) ˆi + ( −4m / s ) ˆj + ( 5m / s ) kˆ

2. Plane mirror are arranged parallel to each other as

shown in column 'I and the number of images Column –I
formed by the combination is in column II. (A) θ = 30° and object is on bisector
Column I Column II (B) θ = 36° and object is on bisector
(C) θ = 22.5° and object is on bisector
(A) (P) 3 (D) θ = 50° and object is on bisector
Column –II
(P) 9
(Q) 11
(R) 8
(S) 15
5. For a concave mirror of focal length 20 cm, match
the following. (Consider the case of real object
(B) 3x (Q) 2
x only)
Column –I (Object distance)
(A) 10 cm
(B) 30 cm
(C) 40 cm
(D) 50 cm
Column –II (Nature of image)
x (P) Magnified, inverted & real
(C) x (R) ∞ (Q) Equal size, inverted & real
(R) Smaller, inverted & real
(S) Magnified, erect & virtual
(T) Magnified, erect & real
6. An object is placed at centre of curvature C of the
spherical mirror. Column II corresponds to
30° velocity of image (I1) in mirror M1 with respect to
(D) 30° (S) 0 image (I2) in mirror M2. Column- I corresponds to
motion of object & mirrors M1 and M2.

3. A point object is placed in front of a plane mirror

as shown and moving with velocity 3 m/s towards
mirror. Mirror is moving with speed 2 m/s towards
object, then

20
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
Column-I Question Numerical Type Questions
(A) O→V towards right
M1→ at rest, M2→ at rest 9. A linear shaped object AB of length 10 2 cm is
V placed before a concave mirror as shown in figure.
(B) O→ towards right The focal length of concave mirror is 20 cm. Length
2
M1→V towards right, M2→ at rest of image in cm is …. × 10 5 cm.
(C) O→at rest B
V
M1 →V towards right, M2→ towards left
2 45º O
V
(D) O→ V towards right A
2
M1 → towards right, M2→ at rest 30 cm
Column-II
(P) zero
10. Two large plane mirror OM and ON are arranged as
(Q) V
shown. The length of the part of large screen SS' in
(R) 2 V which two images of the object placed at P can be
(S) 3 V
seen is x (in m). Find the value √3 x.
(T) V/2 S
M
7. For a spherical mirror, the object distance u 75° P
versus image distance v data were obtained, O 75°
graph will be linear for the match:
Column I Column II N S'
(position of the object) (magnification) 1m
(A) 1/v versus (P) v 11. The laser beam is directed at the axis of a rod of
(B) uv versus (Q) u + v hexagonal section, whose outer faces are
(C) u/v versus (R) 1/u reflecting. The rod is rotating about its axis. The
(D) v/u versus (S) u spot made by reflected beam on the wall sweeps a
length L (in cm) on the wall. Find the value of
L .
8. In column-I possible instantaneous velocity vector
of the image with respect to ground are shown. 90 3
wall
The corresponding velocity vectors of images are
the situations shown in column-II. Match
Column–I with the column–II. 40cm laser source
Column-I Column-II
50cm
2m
(A) C
(P) 12. In the given figure, two parallel rays incident on
F
two plane mirrors at an angle α = a1 + α2 and angle
between reflected rays is β. If β = nα, then find the
O value of n.
v1

(B) (Q) \\\

F \\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\ \\\\
\\\
\\\\
α1
\
\\\\
\ \\\
\\\\
β \\\\\\
\\\\
\\\\\\\\
\\\\ \\\\\\\\ α2
\\\\\\
\\\\\\

F
(C) (R)
O v
13. Find the total number of images formed by both
mirrors as shown in the figure.
\\
\\\
\\\
\\
\\\
///

\\\

O
\\ \
/////

v
\\\
//////////////

(D) (S)
O
60° 80°
///

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

aaa
21
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
14. Assume that you are sitting in a car. You see a Rotating Mirror Rotating Mirror
person in the rear view mirror of radius of Source Source
curvature 2m running towards you at t = 0. If θ
person is running with velocity 5m/s, and it is at
D D
9m distance from mirror at this instant, the average
velocity (in mm/sec) of image of man in first
second is found to be 20 x. Find the value of x. Fixed Mirror Fixed Mirror

19. The view in the figure is from above a plane

15. A boy is 1.8 m tall and can see his image in a mirror suspended by a thread connected to the
plane mirror fixed on a wall. His eyes are 1.6m centre of the mirror at point A. A scale is located
from the floor level. The minimum length of the 0.75 m (the distance from point A to point P) to
mirror to see his full image is 0.3x cm. Find the the right of the centre of the mirror. Initially, the
value of x. plane of the mirror is parallel to the side of the
scale; and the angle of incidence of a light ray
16. Two long plane mirrors M1 and M2 are kept which is directed at the centre of the mirror is
inclined to each other. The angle between 30º. A small torque applied to the thread causes
reflecting surfaces is 40°. Find the maximum the mirror to turn 11.5° away from its initial
number of reflections, the ray will undergo. position. The reflected ray then intersects
M2 the scale at point Q. The distance (in m) from
point P to point Q on the scale is

30 ° 11.5º
40° M1
Normal to the mirror
in its intial position.
Initial Position
of the mirror .
17. A plane mirror of semicircular shape (radius = 1m) 30º
A
is placed in y-z plane with its diameter along y- P
axis and centre at origin. An object is placed on 0.75
the axis of mirror at point (5, 0, 0). At a distance
of 10 m from plane mirror there is a wall also
parallel to y-z plane. The ratio of area of spot of
light on wall to that of mirror is Q
z

r=1m
y 20. In figure shown AB is a plane mirror of length
x 40cm placed at a height 40cm from ground. There
5m Is a light source S at a point on the ground. The
minimum height and maximum height of a man
18. In the mid-19th century, French physicist (eye height) required to see the image of the
Foucault made the most accurate measurement source if he is standing at a point P on ground
of the speed of light using a laboratory-sized shown in figure are x and y respectively then
apparatus consisting of rotating and fixed find 3x + y (in meters).
mirrors. Consider a source of light emitting a
beam which bounces off a rotating mirror and A
40cm

then reflects off a small fixed mirror. By the time

it reaches back to the rotating mirror, the
mirror has rotated by a small angle. This rotation B
will deflect the beam through a small angle 30
40cm

minute of an arc from its original path. If the S P

mirror rotates with a frequency f ( (5/3) x 104 Hz ) 20cm 40cm
and the speed of light is given as 3 × 108 m/sec , 21. A point object is moving with velocity
the value of D (where D is distance between
5 6iˆ + ˆj + 2kˆ (m/s) in front of a plane mirror
rotating mirror and fixed mirror) is α m then the whose reflecting side is xz-plane. If the mirror
4
value of α is also moves with a velocity iˆ − ˆj (m/s), what is
the speed of the image in m/s rounded off to
nearest integer?

22
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
22. Assume that you are sitting in a car. You see a 27. In the figure shown, the speed cm/s of image with
person in the rear view (convex) mirror of radius respect to mirror is :
of curvature 2m running towards you. If person is
running with velocity 5m/s, and it is at 9m
distance from mirror at this instant then find out
the magnitude of velocity (in cm/sec) of image of
man.
23. An object is placed at a distance of 15 cm in front 28. There is a concave mirror of focal length f = 30
of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 20 cm. cm. An object of length 18 mm is placed at 120
Find the length of image (in mm), when object is 1 cm along the principal axis. Find the length of
mm long and kept along the principle axis. image in mm [Assume size of object is small]

24. A very expensive diamond is polished into a perfect

sphere of radius 5 cm. The back surface of the sphere 29. A kid of height 1.1 ft is sleeping straight between
is then covered with silver. If d is the distance of focus and centre of curvature along the principal
source of light from surface of sphere so that image axis of a concave mirror of small aperture. His
coincide with the source. The index of refraction of head is towards the mirror and is 0.5 ft from the
diamond is 2.4, then d = …. × 5 cm. focus of the mirror. Now a plane mirror is placed
so that the image formed by it due to reflected
light from concave mirror looks like a person of
d height 5.5 ft. Find the focal length (in feet) of the
S
concave mirror.
30. A hollow glass sphere of inner radius 5 cm &
25. The distance between object and its erect but outer radius 10 cm is viewed as shown in figure. If
diminished image formed due to a spherical mirror refractive index of glass is 3/2, find distance (in
is 3 times the distance between image and the cm) between A & O as seen by the observer?
focus while distance between object and focus is 4 glass
x. The distance of object from mirror is nx. Find air 10cm
the value of n.
air
1 1 5cm
\ \\

\
\\\\
\\\\\ \\

26. Figure shows the variation of versus for a A O

v u
concave mirror for real object. The line y=3x cuts
the graphs at an ordinate 1.5 m–1.The radius of the n=3/2
mirror is
1
| v|

1
O | u|

aaa
23
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 4
Question Previous Year (JEE Mains) 6. A concave mirror has radius of curvature of 40cm.
It is at the bottom of a glass that has water filled
1. A car is fitted with a convex side-view mirror of up to 5 cm (see figure). If a small particle is
focal length 20 cm. A second car 2.8 m behind the
floating on the surface of water, its image as seen,
first car is overtaking the first car at a relative
from directly above the glass, is at a distance d
speed of 15 m/s. The speed of the image of the from the surface of water. The value of d is close
second car as seen in the mirror of the first one is:-
to : [JEE Mains-2019)]
[AIEEE- 2011] (Refractive index of water = 1.33)
(A) 10 m/s (B) 15 m/s
1 1 Particle
(C) m/s (D) m/s
10 15
5cm
2. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other such
that a ray of light incident on the first mirror (M1)
and parallel to the second mirror (M2) is finally (A) 8.8 cm (B) 11.7 cm (C) 6.7 cm (D) 13.4 cm
reflected from the second mirror (M2) parallel to
the first mirror (M1). The angle between the two 7. A spherical mirror is obtained as shown in the
mirrors will be : [JEE Main Online-2019] figure from a hollow glass sphere. If an object is
(A) 90° (B) 45° (C) 75° (D) 60° positioned in front of the mirror, what will be the
nature and magnification of the image of the
3. A point source of light, S is placed at a distance L object? [JEE Mains-2020]
in front of the centre of plane mirror of width d
Object
which is hanging vertically on a wall. A man
walks in front of the mirror along a line parallel to 20 16 12 8 4
the mirror, at a distance 2L as shown below. The (cm)
distance over which the man can see the image of
the light source in the mirror is : (Figure drawn as schematic and not to scale)
[JEE Main Online-2019] (A) Inverted, real and magnified
(B) Erect, virtual and magnified
(C) Erect, virtual and unmagnified
d S (D) Inverted, real and unmagnified
8. A point like object is placed at a distance of 1m in
L
front of a convex lens of focal length 0.5 m. A
2L
(A) 3d (B) d/2 (C) d (D) 2d plane mirror is placed at a distance of 2 m behind
the lens. The position and nature of the final
4. An upright object is placed at a distance of 40 cm in image formed by the system is :[JEE Mains-2020]
front of a convergent lens of focal length 20 cm. A (A) 1 m from the mirror, virtual.
convergent mirror of focal length 10 cm is placed at (B) 1 m from the mirror, real.
a distance of 60 cm on the other side of the lens. The (C) 2.6 m from the mirror, real.
position and size of the final image will be : (D) 2.6 m from the mirror, virtual.
[JEE Mains-2019)] 9. An object is gradually moving away from the
(A) 40 cm from the convergent lens, same size as focal point of a concave mirror along the axis of
the object. the mirror. The graphical representation of the
(B) 20 cm from the convergent mirror, same size magnitude of linear magnification (m) versus
as the object. distance of the object from the mirror (x) is
(C) 20 cm from the convergent mirror, twice the correctly given by : (Graphs are drawn
size of the object. schematically and are not to scale) [2020]
m m
(D) 40 cm from the convergent lens, twice the size
of the object. 1 1
5. A concave mirror for face viewing has focal length (A) x (B) x
f 2f f 2f
of 0.4 m. The distance at which you hold the
mirror from your face in order to see your image m
m
upright with a magnification of 5 is :
1 1
[JEE Mains-2019)] x
(C) x (D)
(A) 1.60 m (B) 0.24 m f 2f f 2f
(C) 0.16 m (D) 0.32 m

24
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
10. When an object is kept at a distance of 30 cm with a modified scale in which there are 20
from a concave mirror, the image is formed at a small divisions in 1 cm. The value of error in
distance of 10 cm from the mirror. If the object 1
–1 measurement of focal length of the mirror is
is moved with a speed of 9 cms , the speed K
–1
(in cms ) with which image moves at that cm. The value of x is ________.
instant is _______. [JEE Mains-2020] [JEE (Main) 2023]
11. Car B overtakes another car A at a relative speed 17. A thin cylindrical rod of length 10 cm is placed
of 40 m/s. How fast will the image of car B appear horizontally on the principle axis of a concave
to move in the mirror of focal length 10 cm fitted
mirror of focal length 20 cm. The rod is placed
in car A, when the car B is 1.9 m away from the
in a such a way that mid point of the rod is at 40
car A? [JEE MAIN 2021]
cm from the pole of mirror. The length of the
(A) 0.2 ms–1 (B) 0.1 ms–1 (C) 4 ms–1 (D) 40 ms–1
x
image formed by the mirror will be cm. The
12. An object is placed beyond the centre of curvature 3
C of the given concave mirror. If the distance of value of x is _________. [JEE (Main) 2023]
the object is d1 from C and the distance of the
image formed is d2 from C, the radius of curvature Question Previous Year (JEE Advanced)
of this mirror is: [JEE MAIN 2021]
18. A point source of light B is placed at a distance L
dd dd 2d1d 2 2d1d 2
(A) 1 2 (B) 1 2 (C) (D) in front of the centre of a mirror of width d hung
d1 − d 2 d1 + d 2 d1 + d 2 d1 − d 2 vertically on a wall. A man walks in front of the
mirror along a line parallel to the mirror at a
13. Two plane mirrors M1 and M2 are at right angle to
distance 2L from it as shown. The greatest
each other shown. A point source ‘P’ is placed at distance over which he can see the image of the
‘a’ and ‘2a’ meter away from M1 and M2
light source in the mirror is - [IIT-2000]
respectively. The shortest distance between the
images thus formed is:
B
(Take 5 = 2.3 ) [JEE MAIN 2021] d
a P

M1 2a L

M2
2L
(A) d/2 (B) d (C) 2d (D) 3d
(A) 2 10a (B) 2.3a (C) 4.6a (D) 3a
14. An object O is placed at a distance of 100 cm ln front 19. Two plane mirrors A and B are aligned parallel to
of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 200 cm as each other, as shown in the figure. A light ray is
shown in the figure. The object starts moving incident at an angle of 30º at a point just inside
towards the mirror at a speed 2 cm/s. The position of one end of A. The plane of incidence coincides
the image from the mirror after 10 s will be at with the plane of the figure. The maximum
______cm. [JEE Mains-2022] number of times the ray undergoes reflections
(including the first one) before it merges out is-
[IIT 2002]
2 3m
O B

0.2m 30°
15. Two objects A and B are placed at 15 cm and 25
cm from the pole in front of a concave mirror
having radius of curvature 40 cm. The distance
between images formed by the mirror is A
[JEE (Main) 2023] (A) 28 (B) 30 (C) 32 (D) 34
(A) 100 cm (B) 40 cm (C) 160 cm (D) 60 cm
16. In an experiment for estimating the value of 20. STATEMENT-1 [IIT-2007]
focal length of converging mirror, image of an The formula connecting u, v and f for a spherical
object placed at 40 cm from the pole of the mirror is valid only for mirrors whose sizes are
mirror is formed at distance 120 cm from the very small compared to their radii of curvature.
pole of the mirror. These distances are measured Because
aaa
25
REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
STATEMENT-2
Laws of reflection are strictly valid for plane
surfaces, but not for large spherical surfaces.
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for t
Ligh
Statement-1
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;
Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for rMirro
Statement-1 24. A large square container with thin transparent
(C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False vertical walls and filled with water (refractive
(D) Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True. index = 4/3) is kept on a horizontal table. A
21. A student performed the experiment of student holds a thin straight wire vertically
determination of focal length of a concave mirror inside the water 12cm from one of its corners, as
by u-v method using an optical bench of length shown schematically in the figure. Looking at
1.5 meter. The focal length of the mirror used is the wire from this corner, another student sees
24 cm. The maximum error in the location of the two images of the wire, located symmetrically
image can be 0.2 cm. The 5 sets of (u, v) values on each side of the line of sight as shown. The
recorded by the student (in cm) are : (42, 56), (48, separation (in cm) between these images is ___.
48), (60, 40), (66, 33), (78, 39). The data set(s) JEE Adv. 2020]
that cannot come from experiment and is(are)
incorrectly recorded, is (are) [IIT-2009]
(A) (42, 56) (B) (48, 48) o Line of sight
(C) (66, 33) (D) (78, 39) o
22. A wire is bent in the shape of a right angled 12cm
triangle and is placed in front of a concave mirror
of focal length f, as shown in the figure. Which of 25. An object and a concave mirror of focal length f =
the figures shown in the four options qualitatively 10 cm both move along the principal axis of the
represent(s) the shape of the image of the bent mirror with constant speeds. The object moves
wire? (These figures are not to scale.) with speed V0 = 15 cm s–1 towards the mirror with
[JEE ADV. 2018] respect to a laboratory frame. The distance
between the object and the mirror at a given
moment is denoted by u. When u = 30 cm, the
45° speed of the mirror Vm is such that the image is
f/2 f instantaneously at rest with respect to the
laboratory frame, and object forms a real image.
The magnitude of Vm is _____cm s–1.
∞ [JEE Adv. 2022]
Vm
α > 45° V0
α
(A) (B)
0 < α < 45°
(C)
α
∞ u

(D)
26. Three plane mirrors form an equilateral triangle with
23. A perfectly reflecting mirror of mass M mounted each side of length L. There is a small hole at a
on a spring constitutes a spring-mass system of distance l > 0 from one of the corners as shown in the
4πMΩ figure. A ray of light is passed through the hole at an
angular frequency Ω such that = 1024 m −2 angle θ and can only come out through the same
h
hole. The cross section of the mirror configuration
with h as Planck's constant. N photons of
and the ray of light lie on the same plane.
wavelength λ = 8π × 10–6 m strike the mirror
simultaneously at normal incidence such that the
mirror gets displaced by 1µm. If the value of N is
x × 1012, then the value of x is________.
[JEE Adv. 2019]
[Consider the spring as massless]

26
PHYSICS-X II REFLECTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
Which of the following statement(s) is(are) 27. A person of height 1.6 m is walking away from a
correct? [JEE Adv. 2022] lamp post of height 4 m along a straight path on
(A) The ray of light will come out for θ = 30∘, the flat ground. The lamp post and the person are
for 0 < l < L. always perpendicular to the ground. If the speed of
L the person is 60 cm s–1, the speed of the tip of the
(B) There is an angle for l = at which the ray person’s shadow on the ground with respect to the
2 person is _______ cm s–1. [JEE Adv. 2023]
of light will come out after two reflections.
(C) The ray of light will NEVER come out for θ
L
= 60∘, and l = .
3
(D) The ray of light will come out for θ = 60∘,
L
and 0 < l < < after six reflections.
2
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE-1
Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B A D C A D C B B C C B C A B A B B C C
Qus. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. D B B B A C B B C B D A D D D D B C A D
Qus. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. B D B B A C C B A D A B B C C A B A A C
Qus. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
Ans. B A B C D C B A D

EXERCISE-2
Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. BD CD CD AC AC ACD CD AC ABCD BCD ACD CD AC AB ABD
Qus. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. AC AC BCD BC C C A B D A A A A C A
Qus. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. A B B A A C C A C B B D D C D
Qus. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Ans. D A A A C C C C B A C D A

EXERCISE-3
1. (A)→(R), (B)→(S), (C)→(Q), (D)→(P) 2. (A)→ (R), (B)→ (P), (C)→(Q), (D)→(Q)
3. (A)→(S), (B)→(Q), (C)→(P), (D)→(Q) 4. (A)→ (Q), (B)→ (P), (C)→(S), (D)→(R)
5. (A)→(S), (B)→(P), (C)→(Q), (D)→(R) 6. (A)→ (P), (B)→ (R), (C)→(S), (D)→(Q)
7. (A)→(R), (B)→(Q), (C)→(S), (D)→(P) 8. (A)→ (R), (B)→ (P), (C)→(Q), (D)→(S)
9. [1] 10. [2] 11. [4] 12. [2] 13. [2] 14. [5] 15. [3] 16. [3] 17. [9]
18. [5] 19. [1] 20. [8] 21. [7] 22. [5] 23. [4] 24. [5] 25. [2] 26. [1]
27. [5] 28. [2] 29. [2] 30. [6]

EXERCISE-4

Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. D D A A D A A C B A B D C 400 C
Qus. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Ans. 32 32 D B C C,D B A B 3 A,B 40

aaa
27
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
CHAPTER

10

REFRACTION AT PLANE & CURVED SURFACE

1. Refraction and its laws, refractive index, 3. Refraction at plane surface, medium of
speed of light in different media variable r.i. along one dimension
• Change in the speed of light as it passes from one Inc
ide
Normal
nt
medium to other is called refraction. Ra i
y Medium (1)
• Light is deviated due to medium when it is not O
Interface Medium (2)
along the normal. r
• Velocity of light in medium. Refracted Ray
C
v= 4. Refraction at plane surface
µr εr
Let us consider the situation as shown in figure. A
µ r → relative permeability of medium point object O in medium (A) is viewed from
C → velocity of light in vacuum medium (B).
O
ε r → relative permitivity of medium i
i Medium (1)
u
A r I v
• Absolute refractive index of medium is defined by r M
Interface

Medium (2)
C
V → velocity of light in medium
V From Snell’s law, we have
µ1 sin i =µ 2 sin r …(i)
2. Snell’s law Rays are assumed to be paraxial (i.e., near normal
(N) - Normal viewing). So i and r are very small
(I) - Incident Ray ∴ sin i ≈ tan i ≈ i
(R) - Refracted Ray
(I) (N) sin r ≈ tan r ≈ r
Medium(1)
µ1 i
Hence, equation (i) can be rewritten as
µ1 tan i =
µ 2 tan r
r
µ2 AM AM
(R)
Medium(2)
or µ1 =µ2
MO MI
c µ1 µ 2
sin i V1 µ1 µ 2 or =
• = = = ⇒ µ1 sin i =µ 2 sin r −u − v
sin r V2 c µ1 µ µ
µ2 or 1 = 2
u v
Where, V1 and V2 are velocity of light in first and In general, for refraction at plane surface
second medium. following relation is used:
m1 and m2 are refractive index of first and second µ1 µ 2
medium. = …(ii)
u v
• µ 2 > µ1 ⇒ i > r µ 2 < µ1 ⇒ i < r Where,
Rarer medium
i µ1 Denser medium µi = refractive index of the medium in which
µ1 i
incident rays are present.
Denser medium r µ2 µ2 r Rarer medium µ r = refractive index of the medium in which
refracted rays are present.
 Snell’s Law in General Form:
• For different medium of Refractive Index  Particular Case (I):
µ1, µ2 and µ3 …. When object is in denser medium and viewed from
µ1sinθ1 = µ2sinθ2…… = constant rarer medium. Using equation (ii), we get
µsinθ = constant

28
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
Rarer Medium (R.I. = µR) 6. Refraction through slab and prism,
Interface
deviation and dispersion by prism
H’ I refraction through slab
H Denser Medium (R.I. = µD)
Let us consider a slab of thickness d and R.I. as
O
shown in figure.
µ0 µ R −H
= or v = Air Slab
Air
−H v R µD
H
∴ H′ = I1 O I2
S
R µD x
also, d
Shift (S) = Real depth (H) – Apparent depth (H') Consider refraction at air–slab interface
 1  1 µ
or=S H 1 −  =
 R µD 
−x v
 Particular Case (II): or v1 = −µx
When object is in rarer and viewed from denser Now, I1 will act as object for refraction at slab–air
medium Using equation (ii), we get interface
µR µD µ 1
= ∴ =
−H v −(d + µ ⋅ x) v 2
or v = −H R µ D  d
or v 2 =
− x + 
=' H R µ D
∴ H  µ 
I
 d  1
O
Rarer Medium (R.I. = µR) ∴ shift (S) = d + x −  x +  = d 1 − 
H
H’
 µ  µ
Interface

Denser Medium (R.I. = µD) 7. Prism

Prism is combination of two plane refracting
surface
Also, Shift (S) = Apparent height (H') – Real
A → angle of prism
height (H) or S= H(R µ D − 1)
i → angle of incidence
• If refractive index of a medium is function of axis. e → angle of emergence
x, µ =f (x) then normal should be along x. δ → angle of deviation
• If refractive index of a medium is function of 180° − A
= 180° − (r1 + r2 )
y, µ =f (y) then normal should along y- axis.
⇒ A = r1 + r2 …(i)
5. Critical angle and total internal refraction
Deviation δ = δ1 + δ2 = (i − r1 ) + (e − r2 )
µR µR
⇒ δ= (i + e) − (r1 + r2 )
i=θC Using equation (i), δ= (i + e) − A …(ii)
µD i i<θC µD i
d - i graph

µR

i
µD
i>θC

µ D → Refractive index of denser medium;

µ R → Refractive index of rarer medium.
• When a ray propagates from denser medium to
rarer medium for 90º angle of refraction (angle of incidence)
corresponding angle of incidence is known as  Minimum Deviation :
critical angle. For minimum deviation i = e,
• At critical angle refraction takes place So, δmin =2i − A
µ
µ D sin θC =µ R sin 90° ⇒ sin θC = R δmin + A
µD ⇒ i= …(i)
2
• Critical angle does not depend on angle of
incidence. Also, r=
1 r2= r

29
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
⇒ 2r = A Solution:
A From the figure,
⇒ r= …(ii)
2 =
α 90o − A
1sin i = µ sin r =i 90o −= α A …… (i)
δmin + A A =
β o
− = o
−
⇒ sin = µ sin Also, 90 2i 90 2A
2 2
And = γ 90o −= β 2A
(δmin + A)
sin 1 1 1
µ = 2 Thus, + =
⇒ v 15 10
A
sin From geometry,
2
180
 Maximum Deviation: A + γ + γ =180o or= A = 36o
At maximum deviation e= 90° 5
and δmax= i min + 90° − A
8. Dispersion of light
To find imin in different condition
• The angular splitting of a ray of white light into a
r2 = θC and r1= A − θC
number of components and spreading in different
A
direction is called dispersion of light.
 Angle of Dispersion :
imin r1 r2 e A
δ
δr δy v
Red
θ
Mean ray
Using Snell’s law, sin i min = µ sin(A − θC ) (yellow)
Violet
⇒ i min sin −1 [µ sin(A − θC ) ]
=
Angle between the rays of the extreme colours in
1. If A = 2θC then i min= 90°
the refracted (dispersed) light is called angle of
2. If A > 2θC then i min > 0 dispersion. θ = δ v − δr
3. If A < θC then i min < 0 • Dispersive power (w) of the medium of the
4. For i min < i < 90° light ray comes out. material of prism is given by
angular dispersion θ
5. For i < i min T.I.R. occurs.= ω =
deviation of mean ray (yellow) δ y
 Thin Prism:
For thin prism A ≤ 10°  For small angled prism :
A ≤ 10° δ v= (n v − 1)A δR= (n R − 1)A
sin i = i, sin r1 = r1 , sin r2 = r2 , sin e = e
δ y= (n t − 1)A
1sin i =
µ sin r1 ⇒ i=
µr1 
and,  …(i) π A π π
µ sin r2 =
i sin e ⇒ e=
µr2  Here − + − 2A = and n y refractive index
2 2 2 2
deviation
of material for violet, red and yellow colours
δ = (i + e) − A ⇒ δ = µ(r1 + r2 ) − A respectively.
using equation (i) an r1 + r2= A, δ= A(µ − 1) =ω
δ y − δR (nv − nR )
=
δy (ny − 1)
If n y is not given in the problem then take
Example-01
The cross-section of the glass prism has the form of nv + nR
ny =
an isosceles triangle. One of the equal faces is 2
silvered. A ray of light incident normally on the  Cause of dispersion:
other equal face and after being reflected twice, dependence of n on l according to cauchy’s
emerges through the base of prism along the b
formula n(λ) = a + 2
normal. Find the angle of the prism. λ
A
α
i 9. Combination of two prism
i
(i) Achromatic Combination :
β
γ
It is used for deviation without dispersion for this
γ combination
γ
θcomb =
0

30
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
A1 11. Magnification by curved surface
2 from Snell’s law, µ1 sin i =
µ 2 sin r
1
A2 for paraxial rays, µ1i =µ 2 r
net mean deviation δnet = [n y1 − 1]A1 − [n y2 − 1]A 2  OO '   II ' 
⇒ (µ1 )   =
µ2  
 n v + n R1   n v − nR2   PO   PI 
=
δnet  1 − 1 A1 −  2 − 1 A 2
 2   2  µ1 (+O) µ 2 (−I)
⇒ =
 ω  (−u) +v
δ1 1 − 1  and ω1δ1 + ω2 δ2 =0 where
also δnet =
 ω2  so, magnification,
ω1 and ω2 are depressive powers for the two I µ1v
m= =
O µ2 u
prisms and δ1 and δ2 are the mean deviation
O’
produced by them.
C I
(ii) Direct Vision Combination i
O P r
It is used for producing dispersion without u
deviation, condition for direct vision combination v I’
is
White Example-02
light A1 A linear object of length 4 cm is placed at 30 cm
Mean ray
A2 (yellow) from the plane surface of hemispherical glass of
radius 10 cm. The hemispherical glass is
deviation of mean ray (dy) = 0
surrounded by water. Find the final position and
⇒ (n y1 − 1)A1 = (n y2 − 1)A 2
size of the image
 n v1 + n R1   n v2 + n R 2 
 − 1=
 A1  − 1 A 2
 2   2 
net angle of dispersion
⇒ θ=
net (n v1 − n R1 )A1 − (n v2 − n R 2 )A 2
Solution:
or θnet = δ y1 (ω1 − ω2 )
4 3
For 1st surface µ1 = , µ 2 = , u =−20 cm,
3 2
10. Refraction at spherical surface (paraxial
and R = +10 cm,
ray) chromatic abberation
µ µ (µ − µ1 )
in D ocm, i = α + β …(i) using 2 − 1 =2
v u R
in ∆ cmi, β = r + γ …(ii)
according to snell’s law, µ1 sin i =
µ 2 sin r ⇒
( ) ( ) (
3
2
−
4
3
=
3 −4
2 3 )
v (−20) 10
for paraxial ray, µ1i =µ 2 r
⇒ v = –30 cm
from eq. (i) and (ii), µ1 (α + β) = µ 2 (β − γ )
A 'B' µ1v
M using =
µ1 i µ2 AB µ 2 u

( )
r
α β γ 4 (−30)
A 'B' 3
O u P C I
⇒ =

⇒ µ1α + µ 2 γ = (µ 2 − µ1 )β
v (4cm)
2 ( )
3 (−20)
st
B” B’ 1 surface
PM PM PM B
⇒ µ1 + µ2 = (µ 2 − µ1 )
PO PI PC 5.3cm 5.3cm 4cm
µ1 µ 2 (µ 2 − µ1 ) A’ A’ A
⇒ + = u
−u v R v
µ 2 µ1 (µ 2 − µ1 )
⇒ − = u’
v u R v’
Note: ⇒ A'B' = 5.3 cm
1. The formula is applicable only for paraxial rays. A 'B' behaves as the object for plane surface
µ µ 3 4
2. When surface is plane, R = ∞ , 2 = 1 µ=
'
, µ'2= and R =
∞, u ' =
−40
V u 1
2 3

31
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II

⇒=
µ'2 µ1'
⇒ =
( ) ( )
4
3
3
2
v' u' v' (−40) (i)
(ii)
Solving it we will get, v ' = −25.4 cm

Now using,
A"B"
=
( )
µ1' v Plano convex lens

( )
Biconvex Lens
A 'B' µ'2 u

⇒
A"B"
=
( )
3 ( −35.4 )
2 (iii) (iv)
(5.3) ( )
4 ( −40 )
3
Biconcave Lens
⇒ A"B" = 5.3 cm Plano concave lens
The final images in all the above cases are shown in
figure. (v)
Example-03
The slab of a material of refractive index 2 shown
in figure has a curved surface APB of radius of Concavo convex lens
curvature 10 cm and a plane surface CD. On the • Centre most point (P) of lens is known as optical
left of APB is air and on the right of CD is water centre
with refractive indices as given in the figure. An • Line joining both the center of curvature and
object O is placed at a distance of 15 cm from the optical center is called principal axis.
pole P as shown. What is the distance of final image
(I) Real focus:
of O from P as shown. What is the distance of final
(2nd focus, Main focus) converging point of
image of O from P as viewed from the left?
parallel beam of light is known as real focus
(u =∞, v =
A C
f)
µ= 1 µ = 4/3

P O
Right F2 F2
15cm
D f2
Left B
20cm f2

30cm (II) 1st Focus:

Solution: If ray coming from a point or converging to a
In case of refraction from a curved surface, point after refraction become parallel then the
µ µ µ 2 − µ1 point is known as 1st focus.
we have 2 − 1 =
V U R
Here 2 µ = 2; µ1 = 1 F1
F1
R = –10 cm and f1

u = –15 cm
1 2 1− 2 f1
So − = , i.e., ν = −30 cm
ν (−15) −10 Note:
i.e., the curved surface will form virtual image I at a (A) For convex lens f 2 =
+ ve,f1 =
− ve
distance of 30 cm from P. Since, the image is virtual (B) For concave lens f 2 =
− ve,f1 =
+ ve
there will be no refraction at the plane surface CD (as  Refraction Through Thin Lens
the rays are not actually passing through the Focal Plane
boundary), the distance of final image I from P will Focal Plane

remain 30 cm. F
C F
C

12. Thin lens & its properties f

f
• A lens is a homogenous transparent medium (such (a) Refraction through a
convex lens
(b) Refraction through a
concave lens
as glass) bounded by two curved surfaces or one
curved and a one plane surface.  Lens maker formula, power of lens lens
 Types of Lens: maker’s formula:
Assume R1 and R 2 are Radius of curvature of µS → refractive index of surrounding
first and second surface. µ1 → refractive index of lens

32
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
 For surface of radius R1 : (iii) A ray passing through first focus or directed
µ I µs (µl − µs ) towards first focus, after refraction from the lens
− = … (i) becomes parallel to the principal axis as shown in
v' u R1
figure.
 For surface of radius R2 :
µs µl (µs − µl )
− = … (ii)
v v' R2 C F1
F1 C
adding equation (i) and (ii) f f
 1 1  (µl − µs )  1 1 
⇒ = v−u  −  (a) (b)
  µs  R1 R 2  14. Magnification
1 1  µl  1 1  This is defined as the ratio of size of image to the
− =  − 1  −  …(iii)
size of object.
v u  µs  1R R 2 
Size of image (I)
If u = ∞ then v = f Magnification (m) =
Size of object (O)
1  μl  1 1 
=  − 1 −  (A) Transverse or Lateral Magnification (mT)
f  μs   R1 R 2  It is defined as the ratio of any transverse
(Lens Maker’s Formula) …(iv) dimension of the image to the corresponding
From equation (iii) and (iv) transverse dimension of the object. Let the size of
1 1 1 the object and image be denoted by O and I
= – (R) Lens Formula
f v u I
respectively. mT =
Note: O
Condition for application of Len’s makers formula (B) It is defined as longitudinal magnification the ratio
1. Medium on both sides of lens should be same of the length of the image to the corresponding
2. Lens should be thin length of the object.
3. Light rays should be paraxial v P − vQ
mL =
uP − uQ
13. Power of lens
dv
Power of a lens is defined as the ratio of the For small object, m L =
refractive index of the surrounding medium and du
the focal length of the lens in that medium f. The Differentiating lens equation, we get
unit of power is diopter. dv  du 
Mathematically it can be written as − −  −  =0 or dv2 − du2 =
0
v2  v2  v u
μ
P= [f in metre] dv v 2  v 
2
f and therefore, m=
L = =  =
 m2
u
2
Rules for image formation and magnification etc. du u
Ray diagram Therefore, for small object longitudinal
 Position and Nature of Image Formed For A magnification is square of transverse
Given Position Of Object magnification.
The following rules are used for image formation
in case of thin lenses : (A) For Convergent or Convex Lens
(i) A ray passing through optical centre proceeds Position
Ray-
undeviated through the lens as shown in figure. S.N. of Details of Image
Diagram
Object
Real,
C C inverted,
At Diminished F 2
1. F
infinity (m << -1) 1

(a) (b)
at F
(ii) A ray passing parallel to the principal axis after
refraction through the lens passes or appears to
pass through second focal point as shown in Real,
figure. inverted,
Between Diminished
I
F2 2. infinity (m < -1) O
C F2 C and 2F between F
f and 2F
f
(a) (b)

33
 REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
Real, When a lens is silvered, it behaves like a spherical
inverted, mirror whose power (Peq ) is given by Peq = ΣPi
Equal I
3. At 2F O
(m = –1) at
2F

Real, Where Pi is the power of lens or mirror to be taken

inverted, as many times as the number of refraction or
Between Enlarged reflection. For example, let us consider silvered
F 2F I
4. 2F and (m > –1) 2F O F =
equiconvex lens then Peq 2PL + PM
F between 2F
and infinity As final image is formed after three optical events
involving two refraction through lens and one
Real, reflection at plane mirror. The focal length of
inverted, 1
equivalent spherical mirror is given by f eq = −
Enlarged O F 2F Peq
5. At F F
(m >>-1) at 2F
If feq is –ve then mirror is concave and, if feq is +
infinity ve, then mirror is convex.

16. Formation of image by displacement

Virtual, method
Between Erect,
F 2F In this method, an object and a screen are placed at
6. 2F F
F and O Enlarged a distance a apart. A convex lens of focal length
(m >> –1) f(f < a/4) can be placed in two position between
the object and the screen such that a real image of
the same object is formed on the screen in both the
(B) For Divergent or Concave Lens positions.
Position B Screen
Ray-
S.N. of Details of Image
Diagram A'
Object A B"
Virtual,
inverted,very
1. At infinity small F
B'
(m << -1), at u v
u V
F
d
Near Lens a
Between F
Virtual, Erect Let a be the distance between the object and the
2. and optical O F I
Diminished screen and let d be the distance between the two
centre
(m <+1) position of the lens. From the figure :
 Sign Convention: u+v=a
Focal length of converging lens is taken as v–u=d
positive and that of the diverging lens is taken as a+d a−d
negative, if it is kept in vacuum or in a medium Solving, we get v = , u=
2 2
whose refractive index is less than the lens. Using the lens formula and simplifying, we get
15. Combination of lenses a 2 − d2
f= ...(i)
 Equivalent Focal Length of Combination of 4a
Lenses: =
Let I1 A= 'B'; I2 A= 'B′′; O AB
If number of lenses of focal lengths are placed
I1 a + d
coaxially in contact then the equivalent focal m= =
O a −d
1
length of the combination is given by
1 1 1 1 i.e. the one image is larger than the object
= + + ..... + ... (iii) I2 a − d
F f1 f 2 fn m= =
O a+d
2
In terms of power P = p1 + p 2 + ..... + p n
i.e. the other image is shorter than the object
 Silvering of Lenses

34
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
∴ O = I1I2 ...(ii) (i) Consist of two converging lenses called
i.e. the size of the object is the geometric mean of objective and eye lens.
the sizes of the two images. (ii) feye lens > fobjective
and (diameter) eye lens > (diameter )objective
Example-04 (iii) Intermediate image is real and enlarged.
For two positions of a converging lens between an (iv) Final image is magnified, virtual and inverted.
object and a screen which are 96 cm apart, two real (v) uo = Distance of object from objective (o),
images are formed. The ratio of the lengths of the two
images is 4.84. Calculate the focal length of the lens. vo = Distance of image ( A ′B ′) formed by
Solution: objective from objective, ue = Distance of A′B′
Here, from eye lens, ve = Distance of final image from
2
m1 a+d eye lens, fo = Focal length of objective, fe =
= 4.84 ⇒   = 4.84
m2 a −d Focal length of eye lens.
a + d 2.2 (vi) Final image is formed at D : Magnification
⇒ = vo  D
a −d 1 mD = − 1 + 
 and length of the
Putting a = 96 cm gives d = 36 cm uo  fe 

a 2 − d2 microscope tube (distance between two

∴ = f = 20.625 cm lenses) is LD = vo + ue .
4a
Generally object is placed very near to the
17. Optical Instrument principal focus of the objective hence uo ~= fo .
Microscope : The eye piece is also of small focal length and
It is an optical instrument used to see very small the image formed by the objective is also very
objects. It’s magnifying power is given by near to the eye piece.
Visual angle with instrument(β )
m=
Visual angle when object is placed at least distance of distinct vision (α )
So vo ~= LD , the length of the tube.
−L D
Hence, we can write mD = 1 + 
(A) Simple microscope 
fo  fe 
(i) It is a single convex lens of lesser focal length.
(vii) Final image is formed at ∞ : Magnification
(ii) Also called magnifying glass or reading lens.
v0 D
(iii) Magnification’s, when final image is formed m∞ = − . and length of tube L∞ = v0 + fe
u0 fe
at D and ∞ (i.e. m D and m∞ )
In terms of length m∞ = (L∞ − fo − fe )D
 D D fo fe
mD =  1 +  and m∞ =  
 f  max  f  min (viii) For large magnification of the compound
(iv) If lens is kept at a distance a from the eye then microscope, both fo and fe should be small.
mD = 1 +
D−a
and m∞ = D − a (ix) If the length of the tube of microscope
f f
A′
increases, then its magnifying power
increases.
Virtual and (x) The magnifying power of the compound
enlarged
microscope may be expressed as
image A
M = mo × me ; where mo is the magnification
of the objective and me is magnifying power
B′ F B
of eye piece.
Astronomical Telescope (Refracting Type) :
ve=D to ∞
By astronomical telescope heavenly bodies are
(B) Compound microscope seen.
uo vo ue
A fo ue

A
B
B′ B′
B Q E Q
O E

O A′
A′

P
ve=D to ∞ ve=D to ∞
(1) fobjective > feyelens and d objective > d eye lens .

35
REF RACTIO N A T PLA NE & CURV ED SURFAC E PHY SICS- XII
(2) Intermediate image is real, inverted and small. (A) Objective is a converging lens while eye lens
(3) Final image is virtual, inverted and small. is diverging lens.
f0 fe f0
(4) Magnification : m D 1 (B) Magnification : m D f0 1 fe and m
fe D fe D fe

and m fo (C) Length : LD f0 ue and L f0 fe

fe
(5) Length : LD f0 ue and L f0 fe Reflecting Telescope :
Terrestrial Telescope : Reflecting telescopes are based upon the same
It is used to see far off object on the earth. principle except that the formation of images takes
ve = D to
place by reflection instead of by refraction.
P
A T1
A'' Light
B Q B' 45o f
O B'' M
A' Erecting lens
T2
fo 2f 2f Ue

Fig. 29.84 Objective Eye piece

(A) It consists of three converging lens : objective,

eye lens and erecting lens.
(B) If fo is focal length of the concave spherical mirror
f0 fe f0 used as objective and fe, the focal length of the
(C) Magnification : mD 1 and m
fe D fe eye-piece, the magnifying power of the reflecting
fo
(D) Length : LD f0 4f ue and L f0 4f fe telescope is given by m
fe
Galilean Telescope :
Further, if D is diameter of the objective and d, the
It is also type of terrestrial telescope but of much
diameter of the pupil of the eye, then brightness
smaller field of view.
D2
ve=D to ratio ( ) is given by
A d2
P

B
Q E A
O
B

ue
fo

36
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE

EXERCISE # 1
Based On Refraction at plane surface 7. The refractive index of diamond is 2.0. The
velocity of light in diamond in cm/s is
1. A ray of light passes through four transparent
(A) 6 × 1010 (B) 1.5 × 1010
media with refractive indices µ1 , µ 2 , µ3 and µ 4 as
(C) 1.5 × 108 (D) 6 × 108
shown in the figure, the surfaces of all media are
parallel. 8. A ray of light passes through an equilateral prism
such that the angle of incidence and the angle of
emergence are both equal to 3/4th of the angle of
prism. The angle of minimum deviation is
(A) 15º (B) 30º (C) 45º (D) 60º.
9. A given ray of light suffers minimum deviation in
an equilateral prism P. Additional prisms Q and R
of identical shape and of the same material as P
If the emergent ray cd is parallel to the incident are now added as shown in the figure.
ray ab, we must have
(A) µ1 =µ 2 (B) µ 2 =µ3 (C) µ3 =µ 4 (D) µ 4 =µ1 Q
P R
2. A ray of light falls on a transparent glass slab with
refractive index (relative to air) of 1.62. The angle The ray will now suffer
of incidence for which the reflected and refracted (A) greater deviation
rays are mutually perpendicular is. (B) no deviation
(A) tan −1 (1.62) (B) sin −1 (1.62) (C) same deviation as before
(C) cos −1 (1.62) (D) none of these (D) total internal reflection.
10. A diverging beam of light from a point source S
3. A 4.0 cm thick water layer (µ =4 / 3) rests on a
having divergence angle , falls symmetrically on a
6.0 cm layer of CCl 4 (µ =1.5) in a tank. How far glass slab as shown. the angles of incidence of the
below the water surface, viewed normally from two extreme rays are equal. If the thickness of the
above, does the bottom of the tank seem to be glass slab is t and the refractive index n,
S
(A) 7.0 cm (B) 8.0 cm (C) 9.0 cm (D)10.0 cm.
4. An isosceles prism of angle 120º has a refractive  

index of . 2 Two parallel monochromatic rays i i

enter the prism parallel to each other in air as n l

shown. then the divergence angle of the emergent beam is
(A) zero (B) α
sin i
120º
(C) (D) 2sin −1 (1 / n)
sin r
11. Light is incident from vacuum on the surface of a
the rays emerging from the opposite faces medium of refractive index. If the angle of
(A) are parallel to each other incidence obeys the relation , the angle between
(B) are diverging the reflected and refracted rays is
(C) make an angle 30º with each other (A) 30º (B) 45º
(D) make an angle 60º with each other (C) 90º (D) 135º
5. The velocity of light in a medium is half its 12. A light ray of frequency v and wavelength l enters
velocity in air. If a ray of light emerges from such a liquid of refractive index 3/2. The ray travels in
a medium into air, the angle of incidence, at which the liquid with
it will be totally internally reflected, is 2
(A) 15º (B) 30º (C) 45º (D) 60º. (A) frequency v and wavelength   λ
3
6. The refractive indices of a medium for two waves
3
A and B are n1 and n2 respectively. If, n1 > n 2 (B) frequency v and wavelength   λ
2
which will travel faster in the medium?
(A) A (B) B (C) frequency v and wavelength λ
(C) Both A and B 3
(D) frequency   v and wavelength λ.
(D) Neither of the two waves. 2

37
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
13. A small angled prism has its refracting angle A = sin i
17. In the figure shown is equal to.
4º and refractive index = 3/2. It is placed with its sin r
base horizontal in front of a vertical mirror. A
horizontal ray of light passes through the prism
and is reflected back from the mirror. By what
angle the mirror should be rotated so that the
reflected ray becomes horizontal?
(A) 1º (B) 4º (C) 6º (D)8º.
14. A thin prism P1 with angle 4º and made from glass
of refractive index 1.54 is combined with another µ 22 µ3
(A) (B)
thin prism P2 made from glass of refractive index µ3µ1 µ1
1.72 to produce dispersion without deviation. The µ3µ1
(C) (D) None of these.
angle of the prism P2 is µ 22
(A) 5.33º (B) 4º (C) 3º (D) 2.6º.
18. The x-z plane separates two media A and B with
15. A beam of light consisting of red, green and blue refractive indices µ1 and µ2 respectively. A ray of
colours is incident on a right-angled prism as light travels from A to B. Its directions in the two

shown in figure. The refractive indices of the media are given by the unit vectors rA= aiˆ + bjˆ
material of the prism for the above red, green and 
and rB = αˆi + βˆj respectively where î and ĵ are
blue wavelengths are 1.39, 1.44 and 1.47 unit vectors in the x and y directions. Then.
respectively.
(A) µ1a =µ 2 α (B) µ1α = µ 2 a
(C) µ1b =µ 2β (D) µ1β = µ 2 b
19. Two parallel light rays pass through an isosceles
3
prism of refractive index as shown in the
2
45° figure.
The prism will
(A) Separate part of the red colour from the green
and blue colours.
(B) Separate part of the blue colour from the red
and green colour.
(C) Separate all the three colour from one another. The angle between the two emergent rays is
(A) 45º (B) 30º (C) 15º (D) 60º
(D) Not separate even partially any colour from
the other two colours. 20. A thin prism has different medium on its either
side. A light ray is incident almost normally on the
16. Light is incident normally in face AB of a prism as first face.
shown in figure. A liquid of refractive index m is
placed on face AC of the prism. The prism is made
of glass of refractive index 3/2.

What is the angle of deviation if all the angles are

very small.
 µ   µ 
(A) I 1 − 1  − A 1 − 
The limits of m for which total internal reflection  µ2   µ2 
takes place on face AC is.  µ   µ 
(B) I 1 − 1  + A 1 − 
3 3 3  µ2   µ2 
(A) µ > (B) µ <
2 4  µ   µ 
(C) I 1 + 1  − A 1 − 
3  µ2   µ2 
(C) µ > 3 (D) µ < (D) None
2

38
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
21. A glass slab of refractive index µ is placed on a 25. An optical fibre of refractive inde is surrounded by
table top of identical size as shown. A coin C is air.A light ray enters the end of the fibre as shown
placed on the center of the top face. An eye placed in figure. The largest value of f permitted, if the
adjacent to a lateral face and just below the level ray in the fibre is incident on the wall at critical
of table, is not able to see the image of coin angle for the fibre-air interface is given by
through any lateral face. The minimum value of µ Air
for this to happen is
1m
1m φ
C
1.5m
φ/2

φ φ
(A) sin  =
(n ) (B) cos  =
(n )
2 5 1/2 1/2
(A) 2 (B) (C) (D) 3 
2
−1 
2
−1
3 21 2 2
1/2 1/2
22. A cylinder of glass in air is fully filled with liquids φ  1  φ  1 
(C) sin  =
  1− 2  (D) cos  =
  1− 2 
A and B of refractive indicates √2 and √3 2  n  2  n 
respectively as shown in the fig. from a 45° angle,
it is possible to look at the near edge of the glass 26. Two identical isosceles thin prisms of prism angle
and see the far corner at the bottom. The diameter A and refractive index µ are placed with their
of the cylinder is bases touching each other. This system acts as a
45° converging lens. What is the focal length of this
system for parallel rays at a distance h from the
nA= √2
30°
base of the prism ?
√15cm

A
θ
x1
√15 cm h
nB=√3 2
h
x2

5− 3
(A) (B) 3+ 5
2 2h h
(A) (B)
(C)
5+ 3
(D)
3+ 5 ( µ − 1) A ( µ − 1) A
2 2 2 h
(C) (D) None of these
2 ( µ − 1) A
23. Three mediums of refractive indices m1, m0 and m2
are shown in the figure (m1 > m0 and m2 > m0),
27. A ray of light makes normal incidence on the
where µ0 = 1. The lamps A and B are placed at the
diagonal face of a right-angled prism as shown in
bottom and top of first and third mediums of same
figure such that the ray strikes the surface AB of
thickness. If the bottom layer of middle medium is
the prism after entering the prism. If θ = 37° then
illuminated for a circle of half of the radius for
the angle of deviation is (sin 37° = 3/5) :-
which the upper layer of this medium is illuminated, A
AIR
find the relationship between m1 and m2
B
AIR 90°
µ2 µ = 5/3

µ0 B
90°
θ C
µ1 (A) 53° (B) 127° (C) 106° (D) 90°
A

(A) 2µ 2 = µ12 +3 (B) µ 2 = µ12 + 4 Based On Refraction at curved surface

(C) µ 2 = 28. Which one of the following spherical lenses does

µ12 + 2 (D) µ 2 = µ12 + 1
not exhibit dispersion? The radii of curvature of
the surfaces of the lenses are as given in the
24. What should be the angle of incidence at A of the diagrams
spherical glass placed in air so that total internal
reflection takes place at B? (A) R1 R2
(B) R
A B R1 ≠ R 2

R
R
R
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 60° (D) 90° (C) (D)

39
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
29. A lens of focal length f projects m times magnified 36. A thin glass (µ=1.5) lens has optical power of –
image of an object on a screen. The distance of the 10D in air. Its optical power in a liquid medium
screen from the lens is with refractive index 1.6 will be
f f (A) +1D (B) +2D
(A) (B)
(m − 1) (m + 1) (C) +1.25 D (D) +2.5 D
(C) f (m − 1) (D) f (m + 1) 37. You are given two thin identical plano-convex
30. A 16 cm long image of an object is formed by a lenses, one of which is shown to the right. When
convex lens on a screen. On moving the lens towards you place an object 20 cm to the left of a single
the screen, without changing the positions of the plano-convex lens, the image appears 40 cm to the
object and the screen, a 9 cm long image is formed right of the lens. You then arrange the two plano-
again on the screen. The size of the object is convex lenses back to back to form a double
(A) 9 cm (B) 11 cm (C) 12 cm (D) 13 cm. convex lens. If the object is at 20 cm to the left of
31. A thin double convex lens has radii of curvature this new lens, what is the approximate location of
each of magnitude 40 cm and is made of glass the image?
with µ =1.5 . The focal length of the lens is
(A) 30 cm (B) 31 cm (C) 40 cm (D) 41 cm.
32. A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin
transparent material. It can be filled with air or
either of two liquids L1 or L2 having refracting
indices n1 and n2 respectively (n 2 > n1 > 1) . The (A) 6.7 cm to the right of the lens.
lens will diverge a parallel beam of light if it is (B) 10 cm to the right of the lens.
filled with (C) 20 cm to the right of the lens.
(A) air and placed in air. (D) 80 cm to the right of the lens.
(B) air and immersed in 38. A point object is placed at a distance of 3R from
(C) l1 and immersed in l2 point P on glass hemisphere of radius R. If
(D) l2 and immersed in l1. refractive index of hemisphere is 1.5 then position
33. A parallel beam of light falls normally on the of its image from C is
plane surface of a plano convex lens of refractive
index 3/2. If the radius of the curved surface of the
lens is 20 cm, the beam will be focused at which
of the following distances from the lens?
(A) 20 cm (B) 30 cm
(C) 40 cm (D) 50 cm. 15 16
(A) R to the right (B) R to the right
34. Determine the nature of lens shown in figure (P) & 2 3
(Q) [given lenses are made from glass & 8
(C) 7.5R to the left (D) R to the left
surrounding medium is air] 15
39. The graph shows how the reciprocal of
 4
(P) (Q) magnification  µ =  produced by a converging
 3
thin lens varied with object distance u in
(A) P → converging & Q→ diverging displacement method. What was the focal length
(B) P→ diverging & Q→ converging of the lens used?
(C) P & Q both converging
(D) P & Q both diverging
35. A convex lens is used to form a real image of the b
1
object as shown in the figure. m
Then the real inverted image is as shown in
the following figure : u
a c
(A) a/b (B) bc/a (C) c/b (D) ab/c
40. A ray of light parallel to the axis of a converging
lens (having focal length f) strikes it a small
distance ‘h’ from its optical centre. A thin prism
having angle θ and refractive index µ is placed
normal to the axis of lens at a distance ‘d’ from it.
What should be the value of µ so that the ray
(A) (B) (C) (D)
emerges parallel to the lens axis

40
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
46. A convex spherical refracting surface with radius
h 5
θ
R separates a medium having refractive index
2
d from air. As an object (in air) approaches the
h h surface from far away from the surface along the
(A) +1 (B) central axis, its image
fθ fθ
(A) changes from real to virtual when it is at a
h h
(C) (D) +1 distance R from the surface
(d + f ) θ (d + f ) θ
(B) changes from virtual to real when it is at a
41. Figure shows two convex lenses A and B, each distance R from the surface
made up of three different transparent materials. (C) changes from real to virtual when it is at a
The number of images formed, of an object kept 2R
on the principal axis of each lens will be distance from the surface
3
(D) changes from virtual to real when it is at a
2R
distance from the surface
3
47. Which of these actions will move the real image
(A) 3 and 3 (B) 3 and 1 point P' farther from the boundary ?
(C) 1 and 1 (D) 3 and 2 (A) Decrease the index of refraction n.
42. Two coaxial convex lenses have an effective (B) Increase the distance S.
power of P0 when in contact, figure shows the (C) Decrease the radius of curvature R.
graph of power P versus d, the distance between (A) 1, 2, 3 (B) 1 only
their centres. The difference in their focal lengths (C) 2 & 3 only (D) 2 only
is (Given that P = P1 + P2 – dP1P2) 48. A 20 cm thick planoconcave lens is placed on a
P
paper on which flower is drawn. How far above its
actual position does the flower appear to an
observer looking down normally from top ?
Observer
θ
d

air
R=20cm
(A) P02 cot 2 θ − 4 cot θ (B) P02 cot 2 θ + 4 cot θ µ=3/2

(C) cot θ − 4 cot θ

P02 2
(D) cot θ + 4 cot θP02 2 t=20cm
(A) 10 cm (B) 15 cm (C) 50 cm (D) None
43. The aperture–diameter of a plano–convex lens is 6
49. Consider a system of two thin lenses as shown
cm and the thickness at the centre is 3 mm. If the
in figure. An object of height 1 cm is placed at 40
speed of light in the material of the lens is 2 × 108
cm from convex lens. Mark the correct option
m/s, the focal length of the lens is :–
related to final image formed by the two-lens-
(A) 15 cm (B) 30 cm (C) 30.3cm (D) 10.5 cm
system :-
44. A plan convex lens is made by cutting a f1=20cm f2=16cm
transparent sphere along a plane. The circular
1cm
plane surface of the lens has a diameter of 4.5 cm
and the lens is 0.2 cm thick at its centre. If the
40cm
focal length of the lens, when immersed inside the 8cm
water (µ = 4/3) is 20 cm. Find with what speed (A) Final image is formed at 32 cm on right of
light pass through the material of the lens. 1
(A) 2.4 × 108 m/s (B) 1.25 × 108 m/s concave lens and is cm in size
8 2.2
(C) 3.0 × 10 m/s (D) 1.4 × 108 m/s (B) Final image is formed at 32 cm on left side
45. Figure shows the graph of 1/v versus 1/u for a of concave lens and is 1 cm is size
convex lens with u and v plotted according to the (C) Final image is formed at 14.5 cm on the
Cartesian co-ordinate sign convention. The 1
3 left on concave lens and is cm is size
magnification at an abscissa , is 2.2
µ0 (D) None of the above
1/v
50. A glass rod has ends as shown in figure. The
1/u0
1/u refractive index of glass is µ. The object O is at a
distance 2R from the surface of larger radius of
curvature. The distance between apexes of ends is
3 3 2 2
(A) (B) – (C) – (D) 3R. The range of µ for which the image is real is
2 2 3 3 given by

41
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
air
4
O
R R/ 2 If µ = , then with observer in air, the distance of
2R Glass rod
3
3R
the image from the surface of water is
(A) 2–2.5 (A) 7.5 cm below (B) 17.5 cm below
(B) 2 – 2.25 (C) 22.5 cm below (D) 37.5 cm below
(C) for any value of m > 1 55. A cylindrical tube filled with water (µw = 4/3) is
(D) for any value of m < 2.25 closed at its both ends by two silvered plano-convex
51. A pendulum of length l is free to oscillate in lenses as shown in the figure. Refractive indices of
vertical plane about point O in a medium of lenses L1 and L2 are 2.0 and 1.5 while their radii of
refractive index µ. An observer in air is viewing curvature are 5 cm and 9 cm respectively. A point
the bob of the pendulum directly from above. The object is placed some where at a point O on the axis
pendulum is performing small oscillations about of cylindrical tube. It is found that the object and
its equilibrium position. The equation of trajectory image coincide with each other after every reflection.
of bob as seen by observer is : The length of the cylindrical tube is
O x-axis
µ1 µw µ2
 L1 O L2
µ

(A) 82 cm (B) 92 cm (C) 72 cm (D) 18 cm

y-axis
56. Figure shows a thin converging lens for which the
(A) x2 + y2 = l2 x2 y2
(B) + 2 =
1 focal length is 5 cm. The lens is in front of a
( / µ) 2

concave spherical mirror of radius R = 30 cm. If
x2 y2 
2
the lens and mirror are 20 cm apart and an object
(C) + =
1 (D) x2 + y2 =  
 2 (  µ )2 µ
is placed 15 cm to the left of the lens, determine
the approximate distance of the final image from
52. In the given situation object and plane mirror are the lens (in cm)
fixed while the lens is performing SHM
perpendicular to principle axis with an amplitude
4mm. At mean position of the lens the object lies
on the principal axis. Distance between two
extreme positions of image formed by mirror is (A) 5.3 cm (B) 4.6 cm (C) 6.1 cm (D) 12.7 cm
(consider paraxial light rays)
f=20cm 57. A plano-convex lens, when silvered at its plane
surface is equivalent to a concave mirror of focal
O length 28 cm. When its curved surface is silvered
30cm 50cm
and the plane surface not silvered, it is equivalent
to a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm, then the
(A) 1.2 cm refractive index of the material of the lens is:
(B) 2.4 cm (A) 9/14 (B) 14/9 (C) 17/9 (D) none
(C) 0.8 cm
58. A point object O is placed at a distance of 20 cm
(D) cannot be determined with the given
infront of a equi-convex lens (a fig = 1.5) of focal
information
length 10 cm . The lens is placed on a liquid of
53. The observer 'O' sees the distance AB as infinitely refractive index 2 as shown. Image will be formed
large. If refractive index of liquid is m1 and that of at a distance h from lens. The value of h is
µ
glass is µ2, then 1 is : O
20cm

µ2
glass

\\\\\\\\\ \\\ \ \ \
\\\
\\\ \
\
A B
\\\\\\\

µ=2
\\\\\ \
\\ \\
Liquid
O

(A) 2 (B) ½ (C) 4 (D) none

(A) 5 cm (B) 10 cm (C) 20 cm (D) 40 cm
54. A convex mirror of radius of curvature 60 cm is 59. If final image formed after two refractions through
placed at the bottom of a tank containing water up the lens of refractive index 1.5 and one reflection
to a height of 20 cm. The mirror faces upward with from the mirror forming at same point ‘O’ then d
its axis vertical. Solar light falls normally on the is equal to :-
surface of water and the image of the Sun formed. (A) 100 cm (B) 120 cm
(C) 90 cm (D) 80 cm

42
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
60. In the arrangement shown given that a biconvex 67. The focal lengths of the objective and the eye-
lens of radius of curvature equal to 10 cm and piece of a compound microscope are 2.0 cm and
concave mirror has focal length equal to 20cm. 3.0 cm respectively. The distance between the
Then find the distance ‘x’ such that the final image objective and the eye-piece is 15.0 cm. The final
formed by the system coincides with the object. image formed by the eye-piece is at infinity. The
two lenses are thin. The distances in cm of the
object and the image produced by the objective
measured from the objective lens are respectively

(A) 2.4 and 12.0 (B) 2.4 and 15.0

(C) 2.3 and 12.0 (D) 2.3 and 3.0
(A) 15 cm (B) 22.5 cm 68. The objective lens of a compound microscope
(C) 20 cm (D) 17.5 cm produces magnification of 10. In order to get an
overall magnification of 100 when image is
Based On Optical Instrument formed at 25 cm from the eye, the focal length of
the eye lens should be
61. If the focal length of objective and eye lens are (A) 4 cm (B) 10 cm
1.2 cm and 3 cm respectively and the object is put 25
1.25 cm away from the objective lens and the final (C) cm (D) 9 cm
9
image is formed at infinity. The magnifying power
of the microscope is
69. Least distance of distinct vision is 25 cm.
(A) 150 (B) 200 (C) 250 (D) 400 Magnifying power of simple microscope of focal
62. The focal length of objective and eye lens of a length 5 cm is
microscope are 4 cm and 8 cm respectively. If the (A) 1 / 5 (B) 5 (C) 1 / 6 (D) 6
least distance of distinct vision is 24 cm and object
distance is 4.5 cm from the objective lens, then the 70. The magnifying power of a compound microscope
magnifying power of the microscope will be increases when
(A) 18 (B) 32 (C) 64 (D) 20 (A) The focal length of objective lens is increased
and that of eye lens is decreased
63. In a compound microscope, if the objective (B) The focal length of eye lens is increased and
produces an image Io and the eye piece produces that of objective lens is decreased
an image Ie, then (C) Focal lengths of both objective and eye-piece
(A) Io is virtual but Ie is real are increased
(B) Io is real but Ie is virtual (D) Focal lengths of both objective and eye-piece
(C) Io and Ie are both real are decreased
(D) Io and Ie are both virtual
71. The angular magnification of a simple microscope
64. The magnifying power of a microscope with an can be increased by increasing
objective of 5 mm focal length is 400. The length (A) Focal length of lens
of its tube is 20 cm. Then the focal length of the (B) Size of object
eye-piece is (C) Aperture of lens
(A) 200 cm (B) 160 cm (D) Power of lens
(C) 2.5 cm (D) 0.1 cm
72. If Fo and Fe are the focal length of the objective
65. The power of two convex lenses A and B are 8 and eye-piece respectively of a telescope, then its
diopters and 4 diopters respectively. If they are to magnifying power will be
be used as a simple microscope, the magnification (A) Fo + Fe (B) Fo × Fe
of
1
(A) B will be greater than A (C) Fo / Fe (D) (Fo + Fe )
(B) A will be greater than B 2
(C) The information is incomplete
(D) None of the above

66. To produce magnified erect image of a far object,

we will be required along with a convex lens, is
(A) Another convex lens (B) Concave lens
(C) A plane mirror (D) A concave mirror

43
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 2
One or More Than One Correct Answer 5. Parallel rays of light are falling on convex
Question spherical surface of radius of curvature R = 20 cm
Type Questions
as shown. Refractive index of the medium is.
1. There are three optical media 1, 2 and 3 with their µ =1.5 After refraction from the spherical surface
refractive indices µ1 > µ 2 > µ3 . parallel rays
(A) when a ray of light travels from 3 to 1 no
TIR will take place
(B) critical angle between 1 and 2 is less than (A) actually meet at some point
the critical angle between 1 and 3 (B) appears to meet after extending the refracted
(C) critical angle between 1 and 2 is more than rays backwards
the critical angle between 1 and 3 (C) meet (or appears to meet) at a distance of 30
(D) chances of TIR are more when ray of cm from the spherical surface
light travels from 1 to 3 as compare to the (D) meet (or appears to meet) at a distance of
case when it travel from 1 to 2 60 cm from the spherical surface
2. A ray of light is incident in situation as shown in 6. A lens of focal length ‘f’ is placed in between an
figure which of the following statements is/are object and screen separated by a distance ‘D’. The
true? lens forms two real images of object on the screen
µ3=2
for two of its different positions, a distance ‘x’
µ2 apart. The two real images have magnifications m1
µ1=4
and m2 respectively (m1> m2).
30º
x
(A) f = (B) m1m2 = 1
m1 − m 2
(A) if µ2 > 2 then angle of deviation is 60º
(B) if µ2 < 2 then angle of deviation is 60º D2 − x 2
(C) f = (D) D³  4f.
(C) if µ2 < 2 then angle of deviation is 120º 4D
(D) if µ2 > 2 then angle of deviation is zero 7. Consider the rays shown in the diagram as
3. In the figure light is incident at an angle θ which is paraxial. The image of the virtual point object O
slightly greater than the critical angle. Now, formed by the lens LL is
keeping the incident ray fixed a parallel slab of
refractive index n3 is placed on surface AB. Which
of the following statements are correct .
n1 D
n1<n2 C n
n1 3
A B A B
n2 n2
θ θ
(A) Virtual. (B) Real.
(a) (b) (C) Located below the principal axis.
(A) total internal reflection occurs at AB forn3<n1 (D) Located left of the lens.
(B) total internal reflection occurs at AB for n3 > n1 π
8. The figure shows a ray incident at an angle i = .
(C) the ray will return back to the same medium 3
for all values of n3 If the plot drawn shown the variation of r − i
(D) total internal reflection may occur at CD for n3 > n1
µ
4. In the figure, a ray of light falls on face 1 of a versus 1 = k, (r = angle of refraction).
µ2
piece of glass (refractive index = µ) kept in air.
θ2
Faces 1 and 3 are planar, and the ray is not δ=|r-i|
intercepted by faces 2 and 4. µ1
µ2 θ1
i
O
k1 k2 k

2
(A) the value of k1 is
3
π
(B) the value of θ1 =
The angle(s) independent of µ is/are 6
(A) i + i’ + δ (B) i + i’ – δ π
(C) the value of θ2 =
i + i' i + i' 3
(C) (D) –δ (D) the value of k2 is 1.
2 2

44
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
9. T is a point at the bottom of a tank filled with 14. Figure shows graph of angle of deviation v/s angle
water, as shown. The refractive index of water of incidence for a light ray. Incident ray goes from
is4/3. YPT is the vertical line through T. To an medium 1 (µ1) to medium 2 (µ2). Mark the correct
observer at the position O, T will appear to be option(s).
O δ
Y
P

4m

T
i
(A) to the left of YT (B) somewhere on YT 0 30° 90°

(C) at a depth 3 m below T µ1 1

(D) at a depth < 3 m below T. (A) = (B) Critical angle is 30°
µ2 2
10. A ray of light travelling in a transparent medium
falls on a surface separating the medium from air (C) µ1 > µ2
at an angle of incident 45º. The ray undergoes total (D) Maximum deviation is 120°
internal reflection. If n is the refractive index of 15. An equilateral prism ABC is placed in air with its
the medium with respect to air, select the possible base side BC lying horizontally along X-axis as
value(s) of n from the following. shown in the figure. A ray given by
(A) 1.3 (B) 1.4 (C) 1.5 (D) 1.6. 3 z + x = 10 is incident at a point P on face AB
11. An object and a screen are fixed at a distance d of prism :
z
apart. When a lens of focal length f is moved A
between the object and the screen, sharp images of P
the object are formed on the screen for two
positions of the lens. The magnifications produced B
60º
x
(0,0,0,) C
at these two positions are M1 and M2
(A) d > 2f (B) d > 4f y

(C) M1M2 = 1 (D) | M1 | – | M2 | = 1. 2

(A) For µ = the ray grazes the face AC.
12. Consider three converging lenses L1, L2 and L3 3
having identical geometrical construction. The
(B) For µ=3/2 finally refracted ray is parallel to
index of refraction of L1 and L2 are µ1 and µ2
respectively. The upper half of the lens L3 has a z-axis.
refractive index µ1 and the lower half has m2 (C) For µ =
2
the ray emerges perpendicular to
(figure). A point object O is imaged at O1 by the 3
lens L1 and at O2 by the lens L2 placed in same the face AC.
position. If L3 is placed at the same place.
(D) For µ =3/2 finally refracted ray is parallel to
µ1 x-axis.
O 16. A thin concave–convex lens has two surfaces of
µ2 O1 O2
radii of curvature R and 2R. The material of the
L3 lens has a refractive index µ. When kept in air, the
(A) there will be an image at O1 focal length of the lens –
(B) there will be an image at O2
(A) will depend on the direction from which light
(C) the only image will form
is incident on it
somewhere between O1 and O2
(B) will be the same, irrespective of the direction
(D) the only image will form away from O2.
13. A glass prism is immersed in a hypothetical liquid. from which light is incident on it
The curves showing the refractive index n as a R
(C) will be equal to
function of wavelength λ for glass and liquid are µ −1
as shown in figure (i) and (ii). When a ray of white 2R
light is incident on the prism parallel to the base (D) will be equal to
µ −1
17. One fourth part of an equiconvex lens of focal
Vertex length 100 cm is removed as shown in the figure.
(i) (ii)
An object of height 1 cm is placed in front of the
lens. It is observed that all the images are of equal
Base height. Then
(A) yellow ray travels without deviation
(B) blue ray is deviated towards the vertex
(C) red ray is deviated towards the base O
(D) there is no dispersion

45
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
400 (A) Final image forms at the object
(A) Object is at a distance of cm from the (B) Image forms at a distance 30 cm from
3
lens. concave lens
(B) The magnitude of magnification produced by (C) Magnification of image is 1.5
upper and lower part is equal. (D) Magnification can not be determined.
(C) The number of images formed is two. 21. The figure shows initial positions of a source of
(D) The product of magnification of both the light S and a light detector D. Both S & D move
lenses is negative. with velocity 10 cm/s, as shown. The converging
18. A convex lens made up of material of different lens of focal length 20 cm is fixed. Time instant(s)
refractive index of 3/2 and 2 as shown in figure when the detector detects maximum intensity of
and a point object is placed at a distance of 24 cm light is /are
and radius of curvature is 8 cm. Then select the f=20
10cm/s
correct statement (consider optical centre of lens 10cm/s
S D
as origin) and area of all parts to be equal. (Take
paraxial rays assumption) 90cm
R=
m

A
(A) 3 sec (B) 4.5 sec
8c
8c

µ= 3
m
R=

2
B
µ=2
(C) 6 sec (D) equal intensity at all time
22. In displacement method, the distance between
C 3
µ=
2
object and the screen is 96 cm. The ratio of length
of two images formed by a converging lens placed
(A) An image will be formed at (12 cm, 0) between them is 4. Then
(B) An image will be formed at (4.8 cm, 0) (A) ratio of the length of object to the length of
(C) An image will be formed at (12 cm, 1.5 cm)
shorter image is 2.
(D) An image formed by part 'B' will be brighter
(B) distance between the two positions of the
than 'A'
lens is 32 cm.
19. A spherical transparent medium of refractive index
(C) focal length of the lens is 64/3 cm.
n is placed in air. A thin parallel beam of light of
(D) when the shorter image is formed on screen,
monochromatic wavelength λ is incident at a point
distance of the lens from the screen is 32 cm.
O of the sphere at an angle of incidence i. Then
which of the following statements will be true for 23. A lens forms 3 times magnified image of an object
this optic system? on screen. When the distance between the screen
i
and the lens is increased by 10 cm and object is
O also moved to get 5 times magnified image again
C
on the screen. Then :-
(A) Focal length of the lens is 5 cm
(A) For the ray to come out of the sphere after (B) Focal length of the lens is –5 cm
refraction through it, the incident angle i 20
(C) The displacement of the object is cm
should be less than the critical angle C for 3
the medium of the sphere. towards the lens
(B) The angle of emergence θ (made with the 20
normal) for the ray will be equal to the (D) The displacement of the object is cm
3
incident angle i for all values of i.
away the lens
(C) If angle (grazing incidence) the emergent ray
will come out grazing the surface. 24. The distance between an electric lamp and a screen is
(D) If the angle of incidence i is such that the d = 1m. A convergent lens of focal length f = 21 cm
angle of refraction at O is equal to the critical is placed between the lamp and screen such that a
angle C for the medium of sphere, the sharp image of the lamp filament is formed on the
emergent ray will be parallel to the incident screen. Choose the correct option (s) :
ray. (A) The positions of the lens from the lamp for
20. An object is placed nearly at focus of a converging which sharp images are formed on the screen
lens of focal length 10 cm as shown in figure. A are 35 cm and 65 cm
diverging lens of focal length of 15 cm is placed 5 (B) The positions of the lens from the lamp for
cm behind the converging lens as shown in the which sharp images are formed on the screen
figure. are 30 cm and 70 cm
f1=10cm f2=15cm
(C) Magnitude of the difference is magnification is
7
21
10cm
(D) The size of the lamp filament, for which there are
5cm
two sharp images of 4.5 cm and 2 cm, is 3 cm

46
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
25. An upright object is placed at a distance in front 28. Equation for the trajectory y(x) of the ray in the
of a converging lens equal to twice the focal length medium is
20 cm of the lens. On the other side there is a (A) x4 = 256 y (B) y4 = 256x
concave mirror of focal length 15 cm separated 1 1
from the lens by a distance of 70 cm. Then select (C) x = 4 (D) y = x
3 3
the correct statements from the following
29. The coordinates (x1, y1) of the point P where the ray
intersects the upper surface of the slab-air boundary

\\\\
\\ \\\\ \
are

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\ \\\\
fL fM
(A) (1, 4) (B) (4, 2)
(C) (4, 1) (D) (4, 3).

\\ \ \
(A) Magnification for the system is –1/2
(B) Magnification for the system is –1 Passage # 2 (30 to 32)
A point object O is placed at a distance of 0.3 m from a
(C) Final image by the system will real and at convex lens of focal length 0.2m. It is then cut into two
distance of 80 cm from centre of curvature of halves each of which is displaced by 0.0005 m as
spherical mirror shown in figure.
(D) Magnification for the system is +1/2
L1
2 x 0.0005 m
26. In the figure shown the radius of curvature of the O
L2
left & right surface of the concave lens are 10 cm
& 15 cm respectively. The radius of curvature of 0.3 m
the mirror is 15 cm
30. Image will be formed from the lens at a distance of
\\\\\\\

air (A) 3 cm (B) 4 cm (C) 5 cm (D) 6 cm.

\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

water 31. Number of images found is

(n=4/3)
(A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 4.
32. Separation between the images is
Glass
\\\\\

(n=3/2) (A) 0.2 cm (B) 0.4 cm (C) 0.3 cm (D) 0.6 cm.
(A) modulus of equivalent focal length of the
combination is 18 cm Passage # 3 (33 to 35)
(B) modulus of equivalent focal length of the A prism is a transparent medium whose refracting
combination is 36 cm surfaces are not parallel but are inclined to each other.
(C) the system behaves like a concave mirror It has the property to change the direction of light.
(D) the system behaves like a convex mirror

Question Passage Based Type Questions

Passage # 1 (27 to Q 29)
A ray of light traveling in air is incident at grazing
angle ( ∠i ≈ 90º ) on a long rectangular slab of a • Angle of prism (refracting angle) A : Angle
transparent medium of thickness t = 1.0 m. The point between the faces on which light is incident and
of incidence is the medium A (0, 0). The medium has a from which it emerges.
variable index of refraction n(y) given by n(y) = [ky3/2 • Angle of deviation (d):
3 d= (i–r1) + (e–r2) = i + e – (r1+r2) but r1 + r2 = A
+ 1]1/2 where k = 1.0 (m)– . The refractive index of so d = i + e – A
2
• Condition for minimum deviation : i=e
air is 1.
y • Condition for maximum deviation : i = 90° or
P air
Medium
e = 90°
A
B (x, y) • Condition for no emergence : µ > cos ec  
t = 1m
2
•
i
θ
Condition of grazing emergence:
=i sin −1  µ 2 − 1sin A − cos A 
A(0, 0) Air x

27. The incident angle at B(x, y) in the medium and

the slope at B are related by the formula 33. A light ray incident at an angle of incidence 60° on
dy dy prism, with angle 30° deviates by 30°. The
(A) = tan i (B) = cot i
dx dx refractive index of the prism is
dy dy 2 2 3
(C) = sin i (D) = cos i (A) 3 (B) (C) (D) 2
dx dx 3 5

47
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
34. A light ray incident normally on one face of an 40. The image of old lady is
equilateral prism emerges out grazing at the other (A) real, inverted and enlarged
face. The refractive index of the prism is (B) erect, virtual and small
2 2 3 (C) erect, virtual and magnified
(A) 3 (B) (C) (D) 2 (D) real, inverted and small
3 5
41. The old lady moves the crystal ball closer to her
35. The faces of the Abbe prism ABCD made of glass
wrinkled old face. At some point you can no
of refractive index n form dihedral angles
longer get an image of her. At what object distance
∠A = 90° , ∠B = 75° , ∠C = 135° and ∠D = 60° . A
will there be no change of the gypsy formed?
beam of light falls on face AB and after complete
(A) 10 cm (B) 5 cm
internal reflection from face BC escapes through
(C) 15 cm (D) None of these
face AD. Find the value of n if emergent beam is
perpendicular to the incident beam. Passage # 6 (42 to 44)
The faces of prism ABCD made of glass of refractive
index µ form dihedral angles
B

(A) n < 2 (B) n ≥ 2 (C) n ≥ 3 (D) n ≤ 3 α

Passage # 4 (36 to 38)
Figure shows a thin prism of refractive index µ and A D
prism angle α. Initially the object is at a distance A = 900, B = 750, C = 1350 and D = 600.
λ from the prism. A beam of light falls on face AB and after complete
α
internal reflection from face BC, escapes through face
AD.
42. If emergent ray is perpendicular to incident ray
object
then the angle of deviation is

36. Separation between object and image is (A) 2α (B) 180°–2α (C) 900 (D) 00
(A) (µ–1)αλ (B) (µ+1)αλ 43. If emergent ray is perpendicular to incident ray
(C) 2(µ–1)αλ (D) (µ–1)α2λ then the value of µ is
37. If prism starts moving towards right then (A) µ ≤ 2 (B) µ ≥ 2
separation between object and image
(C) µ ≤ 3 (D) µ ≥ 3
(A) increases (B) Remains unchanged
(C) Decreases (D) Can't be determined 44. If emergent ray is perpendicular to incident ray
then the value of α is
38. If prism starts moving towards right. Intensity (A) α ≥ 45° (B) α ≥ 60°
of image (C) α ≤ 60° (D) α ≤ 45°
(A) Increases (B) Decreases
(C) First increases and then decreases Passage # 7 (45 to 47)
(D) First decreases and then increases A point object O is placed at the origin of coordinate
Passage # 5 (39 to 41) system. An equi–convex thin lens (µg = 1.5) of focal
One hard and stormy night you find yourself lost in the length f = 20 cm in air is placed so that its principal
forest when you come upon a small hut. Entering it axis is along x–axis. Now the lens is cut at the middle
you see a crooked old woman in the corner hunched (along the principal axis) and upper half is shifted
over a crystal ball. You are about to make a hasty exit along x–axis and y–axis by 20 cm and 2 mm
when you hear the howl of wolves outside. Taking respectively and right side of lower half is filled with
another look at the gypsy you decide to take your water (µ w = 4 / 3) as shown in figure.
chances with the wolves, but the door is jammed shut.
Resigned to a bad situation you approach her slowly, y L1
wondering just what is the focal length of that nifty air
crystal ball.
2mm
39. If the crystal ball is 20 cm in diameter with x
R.I. = 1.5, the gypsy lady is 1.2 m from the ball, O air L 2 water
where is the image of the gypsy in focus as you
walk towards her? 60cm 20cm
(A) 6.9 cm from the crystal ball
(B) 7.9 cm from the crystal ball 45. Total number of images formed by the
(C) 8.9 cm from the crystal ball combination will be
(D) None of these (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

48
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
46. Coordinates of the image produced by the lens L1 52. y coordinates of image formed by lower and upper
will be half
 320 4   160 8  (A) – 6 cm, 9 cm (B) – 8 cm, – 12 cm
(A)  cm , mm  (B)  cm , mm  (C) 8 cm, – 12 cm (D) – 8 cm, + 12 cm
 3 3   3 3 
 320 8   160 4  53. Component of relative velocities of images
(C)  cm , mm  (D)  cm , mm  parallel to x–axis.
 3 3   3 3  (A) zero (B) 1 cm/s
47. Coordinates of the image produced by the lens L2 (C) 2 cm/s (D) 3 cm/s
will be
(A) 140 cm, 0 (B) 140cm, 20 Passage # 12 (54 to 56)
(C) 70 cm, 0 (D) 140cm, 30 3
A equiconvex lens of refractive index µ = is placed
2
Passage # 8 (48 to 50) in a liquid of refractive index '2'. Radius of curvature
Compound microscope & refracting type astronomical of the convex lens is 30 cm. Then
telescope, both utilise two convex lens in general 1 1
arranged at the ends of a co–axial tube but one of them 54. The graph between and for the system is :
is used to see small objects while the other is used to v u
1
1
see distant large objects. For both the instruments v
v
1
resolving power varies inversely with wavelength of (A) (B) u
1
fo u
light used & magnifying powers : M.P.Telescope= ,
fe 1
v 1
−L  D v

M.P.microscope =  1+  (C) 1
(D)
fo  fe  u 1
u

48. You are given four convex lenses 1, 2, 3 & 4

having powers P1=2D, P2=5D, P3=6D & P4=1D 55. For the optical system, select the incorrect
respectively. statement
Choose two appropriate lens to make telescope. (A) For all real object image formed will be
(A) 1, 2 (B) 2,3 (C) 3,4 (D) 4,1 diminished and virtual
(B) Virtual object placed between optical centre
49. Using the data given in above question choose and second focus image will be real and
appropriate lens for making microscope. magnified
(A) 1,2 (B) 2,3 (C) 3,4 (D) 4,1 (C) For virtual object placed between 60cm to
120cm, image formed will be magnified and
50. If the object viewed by above instruments changes
virtual
color from red to blue, then
(D) Image formed will always be virtual and
(A) resolving power of microscope increases but
diminished
for telescope, it decreases
(B) resolving power of telescope increases but 56. Equiconvex lens is replaced by concavo–convex
for microscope, it decreases lens of equal radius of curvature in the same liquid
(C) resolving power for both instruments then select the correct statement
decreases 1 1
(A) Graph between and will be straight
(D) resolving power for both instruments increases v u
line with positive slope and positive
Passage # 11 (51 to 53) intercept
An object is approaching two pieces of a lens 1 1
halves are placed according to diagram. (B) Graph between and will be straight
v u
line with no intercept
1 1
(C) Graph between and will be straight
v u
line with negative slope and positive
intercept
1 1
51. x coordinate of images (D) Graph between and will be straight
v u
(A) – 120 (B) – 30 line with the positive slope and negative
(C) – 40 (D) + 120 intercept

49
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
Passage # 13 (57 to 59)
A parallel beam of light is incident on the boundary of
medium 2 as shown in the figure.
(Given R = 2cm)
Medium II (µ=1)

A B C 2R E F 62. As a result of first refraction, find the distance of

2R D 2R 2R image from glass-water interface
(A) 50 cm (B) 60 cm
(C) 75 cm (D) 80 cm
63. Second image will be formed after reflection from
57. Energy of light transmitted in medium 2 will be
the concave mirror, the distance of second image
(A) half of incident energy
from the mirror will be
(B) one fourth of incident energy
(A) 57.50 cm (B) 52.50 cm
(C) equal to incident energy
(C) 27.5 cm (D) 32.5 cm
(D) can't be determined
58. Which part of boundary between B & D converges 64. The distance of final image from the object P, is
incident rays? (A) 70.2 cm (B) 68.25 cm
(A) part BC only (B) part CD only (C) 62.25 cm (D) 39.37 cm
(C) part BC & CD both (D) none of them
Passage # 16 (Q. 65 to Q. 67)
59. The largest region between B & D from where 5
rays would not pass will be closer to A thin equi-convex lens of refractive index µ1 = is
4
(A) point B only (B) point C only
kept in a vessel and space between the bottom of the
(C) point D only (D) points B, C and D vessel and lens is filled with a liquid of efractive index
Passage # 14 (60 to 61) 3
µ 2 = . Bottom of the vessel is silvered as shown in
There is a spherical glass ball of refractive index m1 and 2
another glass ball of refractive index µ2 inside it as figure. Radius of the lens is 10 cm.
shown in figure. The radius of the outer ball is R1 and
0
that of inner ball is R2. A ray is incident on the outer 3m/ s O
30

surface of the ball at an angle i1.

O
µ1
25cm

i2 B
r2 C 4m/ s
O µ1 µ1
i1
A r1 D
µ2 µ2
R2
µ2
R1
(a) (b)

65. If an object O in front of the system moving on the

60. Find the value of r1 optical axis with velocity 3 m/s away from the
optical system and whole optical system is moving
−1  sin i 1 
(A) sin   (B) sin–1 (µ1sin i1) with velocity 4 m/s away from the object as shown
 µ1  in figure (a), velocity of image due to all refraction
−1  µ1  −1  1  & reflections will be
(C) sin   (D) sin   (A) 11 ms–1 (B) 7 ms–1
 sin i 1  µ
 1 sin i 1  –1
(C) 3 ms (D) 4 ms–1
61. Find the value of r2
66. At the given instant, distance of image from the
−1  R1   R2 
(A) sin  sin i 1  (B) sin −1  sin i 1  given optical system is
µ
 2 2R  µ
 2 1R  (A) 25 cm (B) 50 cm
−1  1  −1  R2 
R1 (C) 75 cm (D) 100 cm
(C) sin   (D) sin  sin i 1 
 µ1R 2 sin i 1   µ1R1  67. Now consider the arrangement as shown in figure
Passage # 15 (62 to 64) (b) in which a plane mirror is making an angle of
An object P is placed on the glass slab A, which is 90 300 from the principal axis of the previous optical
cm thick with refractive index 3/2. A container B of system. Object is kept at point O, the number of
thickness 25 cm having water of refractive index 4/3 is images formed due to all possible reflections and
sandwitched between glass slab A and a concave refractions will be
mirror C of radius of curvature 70 cm. (A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) ∞

50
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
Passage # 17 (68 to 70) 69. Find out radius of curvature of mirror such that
When an object floats in a liquid, weight of object is final image is formed on object
balanced by buoyant force. Buoyant force is equal to 168 188
weight of displaced liquid by the object. Consider a (A) cm (B) cm
9 9
situation where a ice cube is floating on water and a 178 188
small point source of mass "m" is kept on upper (C) cm (D) cm
surface of ice cube. In the base of vessel a concave 9 8
mirror is fixed. Density of ice is equal to 0.7 g/cc.
Density of water is 1 g/cc. Side length of cube = 10 70. Find out the base area of ice from which light ray
enter to the water
3 4
cm, mass of object m = 100g and µice =, µwater = (A) 100 cm2 (B) ≈ 400π cm2
2 3 (C) 81π cm 2
(D) None of these

20cm

68. Find out height of ice cube inside the water

(A) 8 cm (B) 9 cm
(C) 10 cm (D) 11 cm

51
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 3
Q
Question Column Match Type Questions
A=30°
i=45°
1. Consider an equilateral prism ABC of glass
 3  4 (B)
 µ = 2  placed in water µ =3 
   
A
water 75° 75° R
P
µ =4/ 3 µ=√2

Q
A=90°
glass µ =3/ 2 i=90°

Column–I (C)
(A) FG is parallel to BC
(B) i1= 90°
45° 45°
(C) i1 = i2 = sin–1 P R
µ=√2
(D) EF is perpendicular Grazing incidence
Column–II
Q
(P) maximum deviation
(Q) minimum deviation 60°
(R) TIR will take place at surface AC (D)
9 30°
(S) No TIR will take to AB   place at P µ=√ 2
R
 16  Normal incidence
surface BC
2. Four light rays red, yellow, green & blue are Column II
incident on a right angled prism abc as shown.
(P) Total internal reflection takes place at
The refractive indices of the material of prism
for red, yellow, green and blue wavelengths are surface QR.
1.39, 1.40, 1.44 and 1.47 respectively, then:
a (Q) Light emerges normally from the surface
QR.
R 45° (R) Light emerges parallel to surface QR.
Y
G (S) The light ray emerges from face PR
B perpendicularly.
b c (T) When light ray passes through the prism it is
Column–I Column–II parallel to the base PR.
(A) Red Ray (P) Gets deviated from
it's path
4. Convex lens having focal length f in air is kept
(B) Yellow ray (Q) Gets dispersed
(C) Green ray (R) Gets totally reflected in a liquid. The lens is made of a material
from face ac. having refractive index 1.5 and liquid has
(D) Blue ray (S) It will pass straight. refractive index µ. The column I represents the
3. Light is incident at surface PQ of prism as nature of image formed by it for an object
shown in column I then match the column I with
column II (surrounding medium is air in all placed inside liquid at a distance x from lens.
cases) Column II gives the required condition for the
Column I type of image specified by I. Match the nature of
Q
A=100°
image in I with all possible combination from II.
i=45°
Column–I Column–II
4
(A) (A) Real image (P) µ =
3
P
40° 40° R (B) Virtual image (Q) µ =2
µ=√2
(C) Magnified image (R) fl < x < 2fl
(D) Diminished image (S) x > 2fl

52
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
5. Column I Column II (Q) The two parts are separated slightly. The gap
(optical system) (focal length) is filled by opaque material.
screen
R=R
1 2 =20cm
Incident ray

S
(A) air µ=1.5 air
(P) 80 cm
(µ =1) glass (µ =1) (R) The two parts are separated slightly. The gap
is filled by opaque material.
screen
Incident ray R1=R2=20cm

S
(B) (Q) 40 cm
water µ= 1.5 water
(µ =4/ 3) glass (µ =4/ 3) (S) Small portion of each part near pole
removed. The remaining parts are joined.
screen
R1=R2=20cm
Incident ray
S

(C) water µ=1.5 air

(R) 30 cm
(µ =4/ 3) glass (µ =1) 8. In shown situation S is a point source and A, B, C
and D are observers :– (Assuming paraxial rays
only)
Incident ray R1=R2=20cm

(D) air µ=1.5 water

(S) 20 cm AS B C D
(µ =1) glass (µ =4/ 3)
convex concave Plane
lens lens Mirror

Column–I Column–II
6. The greatest thickness of a plano convex lens
(A) A will observe (P) No image
when viewed normally through the plane surface
(B) B will observe (Q) One image
appears to be 3 cm & when viewed normally
(C) C will observe (R) Two images
through the curved surface it appears to be 3.6
(D) D will observe (S) Object
cm. Actual thickness of lens is 4.5 cm.
Column–I Question Numerical Type Questions
(A) The refractive index of the material of the 9. For what minimum value of µ the ray entered
lens in multiple of 10–1 is from AC never reach at the surface BD of prism.
(B) The radius of curvature of lens in cm
(C) The focal length if its plane surface is
silvered in cm
(D) The focal length if its curved surface is
silvered in cm 10. There are two thin symmetrical lenses, one is
Column–II converging, with refractive index n1=1.70, and
(P) 9 (Q) 3 the other is diverging with refractive index
(R) 16 (S) 15 n2=1.50. Both lenses have the same curvature
radius of their surface equal to R=10 cm. The
7. Light from source S(|u|<|f|) falls on lens and lenses are put close together and submerged into
screen is placed on the other side. The lens is water. The focal length of lens system is found
formed by cutting it along principal axis into 100
two equal parts and are joined as indicated in to be cm in water. What is the value of x.
column II. x
(R.I. of water = 4/3)
Column I
11. In the shown figure the focal length of
(A) Plane of image move towards screen if |f| is
increased.  50x 
equivalent system in the form of   . Find
(B) Images formed will be virtual.  13 
(C) Interference pattern can be obtained if screen the value of x.
is suitably positioned.
Column II
(P) Small portion of each part near pole is
removed. The remaining parts are joined.
screen

53
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
12. Two concentric concave refracting surfaces of
equal radii of curvature 35 cm and refractive
index µ = 1.5, face each other in air as shown.
A point object is placed midway between their
common center and the pole of the right surface.
What is the separation between the images 18. For what value of distance x (in m) between
formed by refraction at these surfaces? convex lenses the magnification by the system
does not depend on object distance u.

13. A thin plano-convex lens of focal length f is

split into two halves, one of the
19. The refraction takes place at a concave spherical
halves is shifted along the optical axis. The
boundary separating by air and glass medium.
separation between object and image plane is 1.8
The refractive index of the glass is 3/2. The
m. The magnification of the image formed by one
radius of curvature of the refracting surface is R.
of the half lenses is 2. Find the focal length of the
For image to be real, the object distance should
lens in decimeter. [1 decimeter = 10cm]
be greater than nR, when n is an integer. Find
the minimum value of n.

14. A ray of light is falling on a glass sphere of 20. On the axis of a transparent sphere of refractive
index (n=2) & radius 8 cm, an object is kept at
µ = 3 such that the incident ray and the the distance 8 cm from the surface of the sphere.
emergent ray, when produced, intersect at a Find the minimum distance of the image after all
point on the surface of the sphere. The angle of possible refraction from the surface of the
2π sphere in cm.
incidence in degrees is found to be . Find the
k
value of k.
15. A point object is placed at a distance 20 cm
from a thin convex lens of focal length 10 cm.
To the right of the lens is a plane mirror which 21. A lens is held directly above a coin lying on a
is placed as shown in figure. Find the distance of table and forms an image of it. After the lens has
image formed by mirror from origin in cm. been moved vertically a distance equal to its
Origin is at a distance 11 cm from the lens. focal length, it forms another image of the coin
equal in size to previous image. If the diameter
of the coin is 4.0 cm, what is the diameter (in
cm) of the image?

22. An isotropic point source of light is kept at

16. A small fish, 0.4 m below the surface of a lake, distance of 60 cm from a screen, the intensity of
is viewed through a simple converging lens of light obtained on center is I1. Now a lens of
focal length 3m. The lens is kept at 0.2 m above focal length 20 cm is introduced at exactly
the water surface such that the fish lies on the midway between source and screen and intensity
optical axis of the lens. Find the distance (in I
obtained is I2. Find 2 .
decimeter) of image of the fish seen by the I1
observer from the lens. The refractive index of
water is 4/3. 23. Plane surface of a thin planoconvex lens reflects
(1 decimeter = 10 cm) 50% of light, while the curved surface is
17. A convex lens is placed in such a way that the completely transparent, if final image of ‘O’
left side of lens has refractive index 2 and right after refraction through thin lens coincides with
of lens has refractive index 3. If parallel ray the image formed due to partial reflection from
coming from left side focus at 20 cm from lens, plane surface. If ROC=300cm
the distance from lens where rays will focus if distance between O and air air
20n lens is x (in m) then find
they are coming from right side is cm. O µ=3/2
3 the value of x/4.
Find the value of n.

54
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
24. A diverging lens is placed with pole at origin of 29. An object is placed 30 cm in front of a concave
co-ordinates as shown in figure. Equation of an lens that is made of a glass of refractive index
x 1.5 and has equal radii of curvature of its two
incident ray is given as y = – +3. The focal surfaces, each 30 cm. The surface of the lens
2
length of the lens is 4 cm. The slope of divergent farther away from the object is silvered. Find the
ray is given as (α)–1. Find the value of a. position of the final image in cm.
y 30. Figure shows a silvered transparent cylinder of
radius R. A light ray is incident on cylinder and
x traverse the path as shown in figure. The value of µ
2
is found to be α . Find the value of (α + β).
β
25. When a bright source is placed 30 cm in front of \\\\
µ
a lens there is an erect image 7.5 cm from the

\\\\
6R

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
lens. There is also of faint inverted image 6 cm 5
\\
in front of the lens due to reflection from the
front surface of the lens. When the lens is turned 31. A point object is kept at a distance of 2m from a
around this faint inverted image is seen 10 cm in parabolic reflecting surface y2 = 2x. An
front of the lens. Refractive index of the lens is equiconvex lens is kept at a distance of 1.80 m
x from the parabolic surface. The focal length of the
1+ . Find the value of x. lens is 20 cm. Position from origin of the image (in
10 cm), after reflection from the surface is 10 x. Find
26. Water (with refractive index = 4/3) in a tank is 18 the value of x.
y
cm deep. Oil of refractive index 7/4 lies on water \\\\
\\\\\
\\\\\
making a convex surface of radius of curvature ‘R \\ \
\\\\
\\ \\\\

\ \\
= 6 cm’ as shown. Consider oil to act as a thin

\\\\\\\\\\\
x
object

\\\\
lens. An object ‘S’ is placed 24 cm above water

\\\
\
\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
surface. The location of its image is at ‘x’ cm \\\\\
\\\\\\

1.80m 0.2m
above the bottom of the tank. Then ‘x’ is 2m
S
µ=1.0
32. Radii of curvature of a concavo-convex lens
R=6cm (refractive index = 1.5) are 40 cm and 20 cm as
µ=7/4 shown. The convex side is silvered. The distance x
µ=4/3
(in cm) on the principal axis where an object is
placed so that its image is created on the object
27. A biconvex thin lens of radius of curvature R is itself, is given as 4b. Find the value of b.
made up of variable refractive index
 y
=
µ 2 1 +  . Assume very small aperture 2d O
 d 
 x
<< R. A point object O is placed at a disatnce R
= 7.5 m on the principal axis from the lens (as 33. A spherical mirror is placed 10 cm below the
shown). Due to variable refractive index of lens, level of water. A point object is placed in air 30
there are infinite number of image on the cm above the water surface on the axis of the
principal axis. These image are spreaded over mirror such that these two images seen by an
the length l. Find the value of l (in m). observer above the water surface coincide. The
Y
R images are formed by partial reflection at water
d surface and due to emerging light after reflection
P
x from mirror. µwater = 4/3. The focal length of the
O
R R d mirror is 15 x (in cm). Find the value of x.

28. A thin convex lens having focal length 20 cm is 34. In the figure shown, O is a O
cut into two parts 1 mm above the principle axis. point object placed above 15cm
The lower portion is placed with optical centre the lens L of focal length 10 L
at origin and upper portion at (90, 0) as shown cm. The distance between
15cm
in the figure. A point object is placed at (–30, 0). the object O and its image
Find the magnitude of y–coordinates (in mm) of formed in the plane mirror 1m
the image. Assuming paraxial ray approximation is n × 20 cm find n. Water n=4/3
to remain valid.
Plane mirror

55
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 4
Question Previous Year (JEE Mains) 6. A beaker contains water up to a height h1 and
kerosene of height h2 above watger so that the
1. Two lenses of power – 15D and +5D are in total height of (water + kerosene) is (h1 + h2).
contact with each other. The focal length of the Refractive index of water is µ1 and that of
combination is- [AIEEE-2007]
kerosene is µ2. The apparent shift in the position
(A) – 20 cm (B) – 10 cm
of the bottom of the beaker when viewed from
(C) + 20 cm (D) + 10 cm
above is :- [AIEEE- 2011]
2. A student measures the focal length of a convex  1  1 
(A) 1 −  h 2 + 1 −  h1
lens by putting an object pin at a distance ‘u’  µ1   µ2 
from the lens and measuring the distance ‘v’ of
 1  1 
the image pin. The graph between ‘u’ and ‘v’ (B) 1 +  h1 − 1 +  h 2
plotted by the student should look like-  µ1   µ2 
[AIEEE-2008]  1  1 
v(cm) v(cm) (C) 1 −  h1 + 1 −  h 2
 µ1   µ2 
(A) (B)  1  1 
O u(cm) O u(cm) (D) 1 +  h 2 − 1 +  h1
v(cm) v(cm)  µ1  µ 2 
7. An object 2.4 m in front of a lens forms a sharp
(C) (D) image on a film 12 cm behind the lens. A glass
O u(cm) O u(cm)
plate 1 cm thick, of refractive index 1.50 is
interposed between lens and film with its plane
3. A transparent solid cyclindrical rod has a faces parallel to film. At what distance (from
2 lens) should object be shifted to be in sharp focus
refractive index of . It is surrounded by air.
3 on film ? [AIEEE- 2012]
A light ray is incident at the mid-point of one (A)5.6 m (B) 7.2 m (C) 2.4 m (D) 3.2 m
end of the rod as shown in the figure.
[AIEEE - 2009] 8. The graph between angle of deviation (δ) and
angle of incidence (i) for a triangular prism is
represented by [JEE Mains- 2013]
θ

The incident angle θ for which the light ray (A) (B)
grazes along the wall of the rod is :-
 2   1 
(A) sin–1  3  (B) sin–1  3 
   
1  3
(C) sin–1  2  (D) sin–1  2  (C) (D)
 
4. Let the x–y plane be the boundary between two
transparent media. Medium 1 in z ≥ 0 has a
9. Diameter of a plano-convex lens is 6cm and
refractive index of 2 and medium 2 with z < 0
has a refractive index of 3 . thickness at the centre is 3 mm. If speed of light
A ray of light in medium 1 given by the vector in material of lens is 2 × 108 m/s, the focal

A = 6 3iˆ + 8 3jˆ − 10kˆ is incident on the plane of length of the lens is : [JEE Mains–2013]
separation. The angle of refraction in medium 2 is (A) 15 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 10 cm
:- [AIEEE - 2011]
(A) 60° (B) 75° (C) 30° (D) 45°
10. Monochromatic light is incident on a glass
5. When monochromatic red light is used instead
prism of angle A. If the refractive index of tge
of blue light in a convex lens, its focal length
material of the prism is µ, a ray, incident at an
will :- [AIEEE- 2011]
(A) Does not depend on colour of light angle θ, on the face AB would get transmitted
(B) Increase (C) Decrease through the face AC of the prism provided :
(D) Remain same [JEE Mains–2015]

56
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
14. A convex lens is put 10 cm from a light source
A and it makes a sharp image on a screen, kept 10
cm from the lens. Now a glass block (refractive
index 1.5) of 1.5 cm thickness is placed in
B C contact with the light source. To get the sharp
image again, the screen is shifted by a distance
   1  
(A) θ < sin −1 µ sin  A − sin −1     d. Then d is : [JEE Main Online-2019]
   µ    (A) 0.55 cm away from the lens
(B) 1.1 cm away from the lens
   1   (C) 0.55 cm towards the lens
(B) θ > cos −1 µ sin  A + sin −1    
   µ    (D) 0
15. A plano convex lens of refractive index µ1 and
   1  
(C) θ < cos −1 µ sin  A + sin −1     focal length f1 is kept in contact with another
   µ    plano concave lens of refractive index µ2 and
focal length f2. If the radius of curvature of their
   1   spherical faces is R each and f1 = 2f2, then µ1
(D) θ > sin −1 µ sin  A − sin −1    
   µ    and µ2 are related as [JEE Main Online-2019]
(A) µ1 + µ2 = 3 (B) 2µ1 – µ2 = 1
11. In an experiment for determination of refractive (C) 2µ2 – µ1 = 1 (D) 3µ2 – 2µ1 = 1
index of glass of a prism by i – δ , plot, it was
found that a ray incident at angle 35°, suffers a 16. The eye can be regarded as a single refracting
deviation of 40° and that it emerges at angle 79°. surface. The radius of curvature of this surface is
In that case which of the following is closest to equal to that of cornea (7.8 mm). This surface
the maximum possible value of the refractive separates two media of refractive indices 1 and
index ? [JEE Mains–2016] 1.34. Calculate the distance from the refracting
(A) 1.6 (B) 1.7 (C) 1.8 (D) 1.5 surface at which a parallel beam of light will
come to focus. [JEE Main Online-2019]
12. A diverging lens with magnitude of focal length (A) 2 cm (B) 1 cm (C) 3.1 cm (D) 4.0 cm
25 cm is placed at a distance of 15 cm from a
17. The variation of refractive index of a crown
converging lens of magnitude of focal length 20 glass thin prism with wavelength of the incident
cm. A beam of parallel light falls on the light is shown. Which of the following graphs is
diverging lens. The final image formed is : the correct one, if δm is the angle of minimum
[JEE Mains–2017] deviation? [JEE Main Online-2019]
1.535
(A) real and at a distance of 40 cm from
convergent lens. 1.530

(B) virtual and at a distance of 40 cm from 1.525

convergent lens. 1.520

(C) real and at a distance of 40 cm from the 1.515

divergent lens. 1.510 λ(nm)
400 500 600 700
(D) real and at a distance of 6 cm from the Dm Dm

convergent lens.
13. Consider a tank made of glass(refractive index 1.5)
(A) (B)
with a thick bottom. It is filled with a liquid of
refractive index µ. A student finds that, irrespective 400 500 600 700
λ(nm)
400 500 600 700
λ(nm)
of what the incident angle i (see figure) is for a Dm Dm

beam of light entering the liquid, the light reflected

from the liquid glass interface is never completely
(C) (D)
polarized. For this to happen, the minimum value of
µ is : [JEE Main Online-2019] 400 500 600 700 400 500 600 700
λ(nm) λ(nm)
i

18. An object is at a distance of 20 m from a convex

n = 1.5
lens of focal length 0.3 m. The lens forms an
image of the object. If the object moves away
(A) 3 / 5 (B) 5 / 3 from the lens at a speed of 5 m/s, the speed and
direction of the image will be :
(C) 5/3 (D) 4/3 [JEE Main Online-2019]

57
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
(A) 0.92 × 10–3 m/s away from the lens
(B) 2.26 × 10–3 m/s away from the lens
(C) 1.16 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens d
θ2
(D) 3.22 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens 40°

19. A monochromatic light is incident at a certain (A) 50000 (B) 57000

angle on an equilateral triangular prism and (C) 66000 (D) 45000
suffers minimum deviation. If the refractive
index of the material of the prism is then the 24. Calculate the limit of resolution of a telescope
angle of incidence is 3, : objective having a diameter of 200 cm, if it has
to detect light of wavelength 500 nm coming
[JEE Main Online-2019]
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 90° (D) 60° from a star : [JEE Mains (April-2019)]
(A) 305 × 10–9 radian (B) 152.5 × 10–9 radian
20. What is the position and nature of image formed (C) 610 × 10–9 radian (D) 457.5 × 10–9 radian
by lens combination shown in figure?
(f1, f2 are focal lengths) 25. A convex lens (of focal length 20 cm) and a
[JEE Main Online-2019] concave mirror, having their principal axes
2 cm
along the same lines, are kept 80 cm apart from
A B each other. The concave mirror is to the right of
O the convex lens. When an object is kept at a
distance of 30 cm to the left of the convex lens,
20cm f1 = +5cm f2 = –5cm its image remains at the same position even if
(A) 70 cm from point B at left; virtual the concave mirror is removed. The maximum
(B) 40 cm from point B at right; real distance of the object for which this concave
(C) (20/3) cm from point B at right , real mirror, by itself would produce a virtual image
(D) 70 cm from point B at right, real would be : [JEE Mains (April-2019)]
(A) 20 cm (B) 10 cm
21. Formation of real image using a biconvex lens is (C) 25 cm (D) 30 cm
shown below :
26. A thin convex lens L (refractive index = 1.5) is
Screen

placed on a plane mirror M. When a pin is

2f placed at A, such that OA = 18 cm, its real
2f f f inverted image is formed at A itself, as shown in
figure. When a liquid of refractive index µ1 is
put between the lens and the mirror, The pin has
to be moved to A', such that OA' = 27 cm, to get
If the whole set up is immersed in water without
its inverted real image at A' itself. The value of
disturbing the object and the screen position,
µ1 will be :- [JEE Mains (April-2019)]
what will one observe on the screen ? A'
[JEE Main Online-2019]
A
(A) Image disappears (B) No change
(C) Erect real image (D) Magnified image L
22. A plano-convex lens (focal length f2, refractive M
O
index µ2, radius of curvature R) fits exactly into
a plano-concave lens (focal length f1, refractive (A) 2 (B) 4/3 (C) 3 (D) 3/2
index µ1, radius of curvature R). Their plane
27. Diameter of the objective lens of a telescope is
surfaces are parallel to each other. Then, the
250cm. For light of wavelength 600nm coming
focal length of the combination will be :
from a distant object, the limit of resolution of
[JEE Main Online-2019]
the telescope is close to :
(A) f1 – f2 (B) f1 + f2
[JEE Mains (April-2019)]
R 2f1f 2
(C) (D) (A) 1.5 × 10–7 rad (B) 2.0 × 10–7 rad
µ 2 − µ1 f1 + f 2 –7
(C) 3.0 × 10 rad (D) 4.5 × 10–7 rad
23. In figure, the optical fiber is  = 2m long and has 28. One plano-convex and one plano-concave lens
a diameter of d = 20 µm. If a ray of light is of same radius of curvature 'R' but of different
incident on one end of the fiber at angle θ1 = materials are joined side by side as shown in the
40°, the number of reflection it makes before figure. If the refractive index of the material of 1
emerging from the other end is close to: is µ1 and that of 2 is µ2, then the focal length of
(Refractive index of fibre is 1.31 and sin 40°= 0.64) the combination is : [JEE Mains (April-2019)]

58
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE

1 µ2 µ1 µ 22
(A) θ < sin −1 (B) θ < sin −1 −1
µ2 µ12
µ1
2
µ1 µ 22
R 2R (C) θ > sin −1 (D) θ > sin −1 −1
(A) (B) µ2 µ12
2 − (µ1 − µ 2 ) µ1 − µ 2
R R 33. An observer can see through a small hole on the
(C) (D) side of a jar (radius 15 cm) at a point at height of
2 (µ1 − µ 2 ) µ1 − µ 2
29. A ray of light AO in vacuum is incident on a 15 cm from the bottom (see figure). The hole is
glass slab at angle 60° and refracted at angle 30° at a height of 45 cm. When the jar is filled with
along OB as shown in the figure. The optical a liquid up to a height of 30 cm the same
path length of light ray from A to B is : observer can see the edge at the bottom of the
[JEE Mains (April-2019)] jar. If the refractive index of the liquid N/100,
where N is an integer, the value of N is _____.
A
60°
a O Vacuum
[JEE Mains 2020]
glass
b 30°
B

2b
(A) 2a + 2b (B) 2a + 45 cm
3
2 3 2b 15 cm
(C) + 2b (D) 2a +
a 3
15 cm
30. The graph shows how the magnification m
produced by a thin lens varies with image 34. In a compound microscope, the magnified
distance v. What is the focal length of the lens virtual image is formed at a distance of 25 cm
used ? [JEE Mains (April-2019)] from the eye-piece. The focal length of its
m
objective lens is 1 cm. If the magnification is
100 and the tube length of the microscope is 20
c cm, then the focal length of the eye-piece lens
(in cm) is ________.
[JEE Mains 2020]
a b v
(A) b2c / a (B) b2 / ac 35. The distance between an object and a screen is
(C) a / c (D) b / c 100 cm. A lens can produce real image of the
object on the screen for two different positions
31. The value of numerical aperature of the between the screen and the object. The distance
objective lens of a microscope is 1.25. If light of between these two positions is 40 cm. If the
wavelength 5000 Å is used, the minimum power of the lens is close to (N/100) D where N
separation between two points, to be seen as is an integer, the value of N is _____.
distinct, will be : [JEE Mains (April-2019)] [JEE Mains 2020]
(A) 0.24 mm (B) 0.48 mm
(C) 0.12 mm (D) 0.38 mm 36. For a concave lens of focal length f, the relation
32. A transparent cube of side d, made of a material between object and image distance u and v,
of refractive index µ2, is immersed in a liquid of respectively, from its pole can best be
refractive index µ1 (µ1 < µ2). A ray is incident on represented by (u = v is the reference line):
[JEE Mains 2020]
the face AB at an angle θ (shown in the figure). v
v

v
u=

Total internal reflection takes place at point E on

u=

f f
the face BC. The θ must satisfy :
(A) (B)
[JEE Mains (April-2019)]
B E C u
f f u
v v
v

v
u=

u=

µ2
f f
θ
µ1 (C) (D)

A f u f u
D

59
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
37. A compound microscope consists of an 45. The aperture diameter of a telescope is 5m. The
objective lens of focal length 1cm and an eye separation between the moon and the earth is
piece of focal length 5 cm with a separation of 4 × 105 km. With light of wavelength of 5500Å,
10 cm. The distance between an object and the the minimum separation between objects on the
objective lens, at which the strain on the eye is surface of moon, so that they are just resolved,
is close to : [JEE Mains 2020]
n (A) 20 m (B) 600 m (C) 60 m (D) 200 m
minimum is cm. The value of n is ____.
40 46. Focal length of convex lens in air is 16 cm
[JEE Mains 2020] (µglass = 1.5). Now the lens is submerged in
38. A prism of angle A = 1° has a refractive index µ liquid of refractive index 1.42. Find the ratio of
= 1.5. A good estimate for the minimum angle focal length in medium to focal length in air has
of deviation (in degrees) is close to N/10. Value closest value [JEE Mains 2020]
of N is ______. [JEE Mains 2020] (A) 9 (B) 17 (C) 1 (D) 5
47. An object is placed at a distance of 12 cm from a
39. A double convex lens has power P and same convex lens. A convex mirror of focal length 15
radii of curvature R of both the surfaces. The cm is placed on other side of lens at 8 cm as
radius of curvature of a surface of a plano- shown in the figure. Image of object coincides
convex lens made of the same material with with the object. [JEE MAIN 2021]
power 1.5 P is: [JEE Mains 2020]
(A) R/2 (B) 2R (C) 3R/2 (D) R/3 Image
Object Image in
40. Magnification of compound microscope is 375. the absence
Length of tube is 150mm. Given that focal of mirror
12 cm 8 cm
length of objective lens is 5mm, then value of When the convex mirror is removed, a real and
focal length of eyepiece is: [JEE Mains 2020] inverted image is formed at a position. The
(A) 2 mm (B) 22 mm (C) 12 mm(D) 33 mm distance of the image from the object will be
41. The magnifying power of a telescope with tube _____ (cm).
60cm is 5. What is the focal length of its eye 48. Find the distance of the image from object O,
piece? [JEE Mains 2020] formed by the combination of lenses in the figure:
f = +10cm f = –10cm f = +30cm
(A) 30 cm (B) 40 cm
(C) 20 cm (D) 10 cm
42. The critical angle of a medium for a specific
wavelength, if the medium has relative
permittivity 3 and relative permeability 4/3 for 30cm 5cm 10cm
this wavelength, will be : [JEE Mains 2020] [JEE MAIN 2021]
(A) 60° (B) 15° (A) 75 cm (B) 10 cm (C) Infinity (D) 20 cm
(C) 45° (D) 30° 49. Curved surfaces of a plano-convex lens of
43. There is a small source of light at some depth refractive index µ1 and a plano-concave lens of
below the surface of water (refractive index = refractive index µ2 have equal radius of curvature
4/3) in a tank of large cross sectional surface as shown in figure. Find the ratio of radius of
area. Neglecting any reflection from the bottom curvature to the focal length of the combined
and absorption by water, percentage of light that lenses. [JEE MAIN 2021]
emerges out of surface is (nearly) :
[Use the fact that surface area of a spherical cap
m2
of height h and radius of curvature r is 2πrh]: m1
[JEE Mains 2020]
(A) 17% (B) 21% (C) 34% (D) 50%

44. A vessel of depth 2h is half filled with a liquid (A) µ2 – µ1 (B) µ1 – µ2

of refractive index 2 2 and the upper half 1 1
(C) (D)
with another liquid of refractive index 2. The µ 2 − µ1 µ1 − µ 2
liquids are immiscible. The apparent depth of 50. Cross-section view of a prism is the equilateral
triangle ABC shown in the figure. The minimum
the inner surface of the bottom of vessel will be
deviation is observed using this prism when the
[JEE Mains 2020] angle of incidence is equal to the prism angle. The
h 3 time taken by light to travel from P (midpoint of
(A) (B) h 2 BC) to A is _______ × 10–10 s.
2 4
(Given, speed of light in vacuum = 3 × 108 m/s
h h
(C) (D) 3
[JEE MAIN 2021]
2 ( 2 + 1) 3 2 and cos 30° =
2
).

60
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
A 55. The refracting angle of a prism is A and refractive
index of the material of the prism is cot (A/2).
10cm 10cm
Then the angle of minimum deviation will be :
[JEE MAIN 2022]
B P C
(A) 180 – 2A (B) 90 – A
51. An object is placed at the focus of concave lens (C) 180 + 2A (D) 180 – 3A
having focal length f. What is the magnification 56. The aperture of the objective is 24.4 cm. The
and distance of the image from the optical centre resolving power of this telescope, if a light of
of the lens? [JEE MAIN 2021]
wavelength 2440 Å is used to see the object will
(A) 1, ∞ (B) 1/2, f/2
be: [JEE MAIN 2022]
(C) 1/4, f/4 (D) Very high, ∞
52. When a body slides down from rest along a (A) 8.1 × 106 (B) 10.0 × 107
5
smooth inclined plane making an angle of 30° with (C) 8.2 × 10 (D) 1.0 × 10–8
the horizontal, it takes time T. When the same
body slides down from the rest along a rough 57. The power of a lens (biconvex) is 1.25 m–1 in
inclined plane making the same angle and through particular medium. Refractive index of the lens is
the same distance, it takes time α T, where α is a 1.5 and radii of curvature are 20 cm and 40 cm
constant greater than 1. The co-efficient of friction
respectively. The refractive index of surrounding
between the body and the rough plane is
medium [JEE MAIN 2022]
1  α2 − 1 
  where x = ___ .[JEE MAIN 2021] 9 3 4
x  α 2  (A) 1.0 (B)
7
(C)
2
(D)
3
53. A thin prism of angle 6° and refractive index for 58. In an experiment with a convex lens, the plot of
yellow light (nY)1.5 is combined with another the image distance (ν') against the object distance
prism of angle 5° and nY = 1.55. The combination
produces no dispersion. The net average deviation (µ') measured from the focus gives a curve ν'µ' =
º 225. if all the distance are measured in cm. The
1
(δ) produced by the combination is   . The magnitude of the focal length of the lens is
x _______ cm. [JEE MAIN 2022]
value of of x is __________. 59. As shown in the figure, after passing through the
P2 medium 1. The speed of light v2 in medium 2 will
6º=A1 be : (Given c = 3 × 108 ms–1) [JEE MAIN 2022]
δ

(A) 1.0 × 108 ms–1 (B) 0.5 × 108 ms–1

(C) 1.5 × 108 ms–1 (D) 3.0 × 108 ms–1
A2=5º
P1 60. In normal adjustment, for a refracting telescope,
the distance between objective and eye piece is 30
[JEE MAIN 2022]
cm. The focal length of the objective, when the
54. A microscope was initially placed in air (refractive
index 1). It is then immersed in oil (refractive angular magnification of the telescope is 2, will be:
index 2). For a light whose wavelength in air is λ, [JEE MAIN 2022]
calculate the change of microscope's resolving (A) 20 cm (B) 30 cm (C) 10 cm (D) 15 cm
power due to oil and choose the correct option. 61. The speed of light in media ‘A’ and ‘B’ are 2.0 ×
(A)Resolving power will be
1
in the oil than it 1010 cm/s and 1.5 × 1010 cm/s respectively. A ray
4 of light enters from the medium B to A at an
was in the air. incident angle ‘θ’. If the ray suffers total internal
(B) Resolving power will be twice in the oil than it
reflection, then [JEE MAIN 2022]
was in the air.
(C)Resolving power will be four times in the oil 3 2
than it was in the air. (A) θ = sin–1   (B) θ > sin–1  
4 3
1
(D)Resovling power will be in the oil than it
3 3
2 (C) θ < sin–1   (D) θ > sin–1  
was in the air. [JEE MAIN 2022] 4 4

61
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
62. A parallel beam of light is allowed to fall on a 68. Given below are two statements :
transparent spherical globe of diameter 30 cm and [JEE (Main) 2023]
refractive index 1.5. The distance from the centre Statement I : If the Brewster's angle for the
of the globe at which the beam of light can light propagating from air to glass is θB, then the
converge is _________ mm. [JEE MAIN 2022] Brewster's angle for the light propagating from
63. Light enters from air into a given medium at an π
angle of 45° with interface of the air-medium glass to air is − θB
2
surface. After refraction, the light ray is deviated
through an angle of 15° from its original direction.
Statement II : The Brewster's angle for the light
The refractive index of the medium is : propagating from glass to air is tan–1 (μg) where
[JEE MAIN 2022] μg is the refractive index of glass. In the light of
(A) 1.732 (B) 1.333 the above statements, choose the correct answer
(C) 1.414 (D) 2.732 from the options given below:
64. Match List-I with List-II (A) Both statement I and Statement II are true
List-I List-II (B) Both statement I and statement II are false
(a) UV rays (i) Diagnostic tool in (C) Statement I is true but statement II is false
medicine (D) Statement I is false but statement Il is true
(b) X-rays (ii) Water purification 69. As shown in the figure, a combination of a thin
(c) Microwave (iii) Communication, Radar plano concave lens and a thin plano convex lens
(d) Infrared (iv) Improving visibility in is used to image an object placed at infinity. The
wave foggy days radius of curvature of both the lenses is 30 cm
Choose the correct answer from the options given and refraction index of the material for both the
below: lenses is 1.75. Both the lenses are placed at
distance of 40 cm from each other. Due to the
(A) (a)-(iii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iv)
combination, the image of the object is formed
(B) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv) at distance x = ____ cm, from concave lens.
(C) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(iii), (d)-(i) [JEE (Main) 2023]
(D) (a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iv)
40 cm

65. The X-Y plane be taken as the boundary between

two transparent media M1 and M2. M1 in Z ≥ 0 has
a refractive index of 2 and M2 with Z < 0 has a
O x
refractive index of 3 . A ray of light travelling
70. A person has been using spectacles of power
in M1 along the direction given by the vector A = –1.0 dioptre for distant vision and a separate
reading glass of power 2.0 dioptres. What is the
4 3î – 3 3 ĵ – 5k̂ , is incident on the plane of least distance of distinct vision for this person
separation. The value of difference between the [JEE (Main) 2023]
angle of incident in M1 and the angle of refraction (A) 50 cm (B) 10 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 40 cm
in M2 will be __________ degree. 71. A point source of light is placed at the centre of
[JEE MAIN 2022] curvature of a hemispherical surface. The source
emits a power of 24 W. The radius of curvature
of hemisphere is 10 cm and the inner surface is
66. A convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and focal completely reflecting. The force on the
length 18 cm in air is immersed in water. The hemisphere due to the light falling on it is
change in focal length of the lens will be _______ × 10–8 N. [JEE (Main) 2023]
__________ cm. (Given refractive index of
Question Previous Year (JEE Advanced)
4
water = [JEE (Main) 2023] 72. A thin biconvex lens of refractive index 3/2 is
3
placed on a horizontal plane mirror as shown in
the figure . The space between the lens and the
67. A thin prism P1 with an angle 6° and made of mirror is then filled with water of refractive index
glass of refractive index 1.54 is combined with 4/3. It is found that when a point object is placed
another prism P2 made from glass of refractive 15 cm above the lens on its principal axis, the
index 1.72 to produce dispersion without object coincides with its own image. On
repeating with another liquid, the object and the
average deviation. The angle of prism P2 is
image again coincide at a distance 25 cm from
[JEE (Main) 2023] the lens. Calculate the refractive index of the
(A) 6° (B) 1.3° (C) 4.5° (D) 7.8° liquid. [IIT-2001]

62
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
78. A concave & a convex lens are placed
in contact. The ratio of their powers are 2 : 3
////////////////// & equivalent focal length of the system is
73. A convex lens of focal length 30 cm forms an 30cm. The focal length of the lenses are -
image of height 2 cm for an object situated at [IITScr.-2005]
infinity. If a concave lens of focal length 20 cm (A) – 75cm, 50cm (B) –15cm , 10 cm
is placed coaxially at a distance of 26 cm in (C) 10cm, – 15 cm (D) 75cm, – 50 cm
front of convex lens . Then size of final image 79. The image of sun is formed on focal plane of
would be [IITScr.-2003] lens which is circular in shape of radius r and
(A) 1.25cm (B) 2.5 cm area πr2. [IIT-2006]
(C) 2 cm (D) 0.75cm
74. A meniscus lens is made of a material of
refractive index µ2. Both its surfaces have radii
of curvature R. It has two different media of (A) πr2 ∝ f
refractive indices µ1 and µ3 respectively, on its (B) πr2 ∝ f2
two sides (see figure). Calculate its focal length (C) If half part of lens is covered then only half
for µ1 < µ2 < µ3, when light is incident on it as image will be formed
shown. [IIT-2003] (D) On increasing focal length, brightness of the
µ2
image increases
µ1 80. Focal length of the shown plano-convex lens is 15
µ3
cm. Plane surface of the lens is silvered. An
object is kept on the principal axis of the lens at a
distance 20 cm. Image of the object will form at.
75. A point is located at the centre of glass sphere of
[IIT-2006]
radius 8cm and µ = 1.5 . The distance of virtual

///////////////
image from the surface is – [IITScr.-2004] Object
(A) 3cm (B) 6 cm (C) 8 cm (D) 12 cm
20cm
76. A light ray incident on a plane interface of an
(A) 60 cm, left (B) 60 cm, right
irregular glass slab (refractive index = √2) at an
angle of incidence 45º, Angle of inclination of (C) 12 cm, left (D) 30 cm, right
this interface is 60º. It's other interface is curve 81. The graph between object distance u and image
of (radius of curvature = 0.4 m). The ray after distance v for a lens is given below. The focal
entering into another medium (µ3 = 1.514) length of the lens is – [IIT-2006]
meets principal axis PQ at E as shown in the v
figure. Find distance OE correctly up to 2
decimal places. [IIT-2004]
A C
+11
µ1=1 µ3=1.514
45º θ +10
P Q
O +9
E 10 division u
µ2 = √2 –9 –10 –11

60º
(A) 5 ± 0.1 (B) 5 ± 0.05
B D (C) 0.5 ± 0.1 (D) 0.5 ± 0.05
82. Focal length of objective & eyepiece of a
77. An object is moving on principal axis of a
convex lens of focal length 0.3 m with speed telescope are fO & fe respectively. [IIT-2006]
0.01 m/s. Find the rate of change of position of Column - I Column - II
the object and rate of change of lateral (A) Intensity of the image (P) Radius of
magnification of the image. When the object is curvature (R)
at a distance 0.4 m from the lens. [IIT-2004] (B) Angular magnification (Q) Dispersion
of lens
(C) Length of telescope (R) Focal length
fO & fe
x (D) Sharpness of image (S) Spherical
aberration

63
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
83. In an experiment to determine the focal length 87. A bi-convex lens is formed with two thin plano-
(f) of a concave mirror by the u – v method, a convex lenses as shown in the figure. Refractive
student places the object pin A on the principle index n of the first lens is 1.5 and that of the
axis at a distance x from the pole P. The student second lens is 1.2. Both the curved surfaces are
looks at the pin and its inverted image from a of the same radius of curvature R = 14 cm. For
distance keeping his/her eye in line with PA. this bi-convex lens, for an object distance of 40
When the student shifts his/her eye towards left, cm, the image distance will be - [IIT-2012]
n = 1.5 n = 1.2
the image appears to the right of the object pin.
Then, [IIT-2007]
(A) x < f (B) f < x < 2f
(C) x = 2f (D) x > 2f
84. The focal length of thin biconvex lens is
R = 14 cm
20 cm. When an object is moved from a distance
(A) – 280.0 cm (B) 40.0 cm
of 25 cm in front of it to 50 cm, the magnification
(C) 21.5 cm (D) 13.3 cm
of its image changes from m25 to m50. The ratio
m 25 88. A ray of light travelling in the direction
is ? [IIT-2010] 1 ˆ
m50 (i + 3j)
ˆ is incident on a plane mirror. After
2
85. Two transparent media of refractive indices µ1 reflection, it travels along the direction
and µ3 have a solid lens shaped transparent 1 ˆ
(i + 3j)
ˆ . The angle of incidence is
material of refractive index µ2 between them as 2
shown in figures in Column II. A ray traversing [IIT-2013]
these media is also shown in the figures. In (A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 60° (D) 75°
Column I different relationships between µ1, µ2 89. In the young’s double slit experiment using a
and µ3 are given. Match them to the ray monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the path
diagrams shown in Column II. [IIT-2010] difference (in terms of an integer n)
Column I Column II corresponding to any point having half the peak
intensity is. [IIT-2013]
(A) µ1 < µ2 (p) µ λ λ
3 µ2 µ1 (A) (2n + 1) (B) (2n + 1)
2 4
λ λ
(C) (2n + 1) (D) (2n + 1)
8 16
(B) µ1 > µ2 (q) µ3 µ2 µ1
90. A point source S is placed at the bottom of a
transparent block of height 10 mm and refractive
(C) µ2 = µ3 (r) µ3 index 2.72. It is immersed in a lower refractive
µ2 µ1
index liquid as shown in the figure. It is found
that the light emerging from the block to the
(D) µ2 > µ3 (s) µ3 µ2 µ1 liquid forms a circular bright spot of diameter
11.54 mm on the top of the block. The refractive
(t) µ3 index of the liquid is [IIT-2014]
µ2 µ1
Liquid

4
86. Water (with refractive index = ) in a tank is 18 Block
3
S
7
cm deep. Oil of refractive index lies on water (A) 1.21 (B) 1.30 (C) 1.42 (D) 1.36
4 91. A parallel beam of light is incident from air at
making a convex surface of radius of curvature an angle a on the side PQ of a right angled
'R = 6 cm' as shown. consider oil to act as a thin
lens. An object 'S' is placed 24 cm above water triangular prism of refractive index n + 2 .
surface. The location of its image is at 'x' cm [IIT-2016]
above the bottom of the tank. Then 'x' is - P
[IIT-2011]
S α θ
µ = 1.0
R = 6 cm
n= 2
µ = 7/4
Q R
µ = 4/3 (A) 15° (B) 22.5° (C) 30° (D) 45°

64
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
–2
92. Sunlight of intensity 1.3 kWm is incident 95. Three glass cylinders of equal height H = 30 cm
normally on a thin convex lens of focal length and same refractive index n = 1.5 are placed on
20 cm. Ignore the energy loss of light due to the a horizontal surfaces shown in figure. Cylinder I
has a flat top, cylinder II has a convex top and
lens and assume that the lens aperture size is
cylinder III has a concave top. The radii of
much smaller than its focal length. The average curvature of the two curved tops are same (R =
intensity of light, in kWm–2, at a distance 22 3m). If H1, H2 and H3 are the apparent depths of
cm from the lens on the other side is _____. a point X on the bottom of the three cylinders,
[JEE ADV. 2018] respectively, the correct statement(s) is/are
[JEE Adv. 2019]
I II
III

n2

H H H

x x x
93. A thin convex lens is made of two materials (A) H3 > H1
with refractive indices n1 and n2, as shown in (B) 0.8 cm < (H2 – H1) < 0.9 cm
figure. The radius of curvature of the left and (C) H2 > H3
right spherical surfaces are equal. f is the focal (D) H2 > H1
length of the lens when n1 = n2 = n. The focal 96. A monochromatic light is incident from air on a
length is f + ∆f when n1 = n and n2 = n + ∆n. refracting surface of a prism of angle 75° and
Assuming ∆n << (n–1) and 1 < n < 2, the correct refractive index n0 = 3 . The other refracting
statement(s) is/are : [JEE Adv. 2019] surface of a prism is coated by a thin film of
∆f ∆n material of refractive index n as shown in figure.
(A) The relation between and remains The light suffers total internal reflection at the
f n
coated prism surface for an incidence angle of
unchanged if both the convex surfaces are
θ ≤ 60° . The value of n2 is__. [JEE Adv. 2019]
replaced by concave surfaces of the same
radius of curvature. 97. An optical bench has 1.5 m long scale having
four equal divisions in each cm. While
∆f ∆n
(B) < measuring the focal length of a convex lens, the
f n lens is kept at 75 cm mark of the scale and the
(C) For n = 1.5, ∆n = 10–3 and f = 20 cm, the object pin is kept at 45 cm mark. The image of
the object pin on the other side of the lens
value of | ∆f | will be 0.02 cm (round off to overlaps with image pin that is kept at 135 cm
2nd decimal place) mark. In this experiment, the percentage error in
(D) If ∆n < 0 then ∆f > 0 the measurement of the focal length of the lens
n f is________. [JEE Adv. 2019]

94. A planar structure of length L and width W is 98. A beaker of radius r is filled with water
made of two different optical media of refractive (refractive index 4/3) up to a height H as shown
indices n1 = 1.5 and n2 = 1.44 as shown in in the figure on the left. The beaker is kept on a
figure. If L >> W, a ray entering from end AB horizontal table rotating with angular speed ω.
will emerge from end CD only if the total internal This makes the water surface curved so that the
reflection condition is met inside the structure. difference in the height of water level at the
center and at the circumference of the beaker is
For L=9.6m, if the incident angle q is varied, the
h (h << H, h << r), as shown in the figure on the
maximum time taken by a ray to exit the plane right. Take this surface to be approximately
CD is t × 10–9 s, where t is ____. spherical with a radius of curvature R. Which of
[Speed of light c = 3 × 108 m/s] the following is/are correct? (g is the
[JEE Adv. 2019] acceleration due to gravity) [JEE Adv. 2020]
n2 ω
A C
Air
n1
θ W h
B n2 D
H
L

65
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
h +r
2 2 (A) The light ray enters air if n2 = n1.
(A) R =
2h (B) The light ray is finally reflected back into the
3r 2 medium of refractive index n1 if n2 < n1.
(B) R = (C) The light ray is finally reflected back into the
2h
(C) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker medium of refractive index n1 if n2 > n1.
−1 (D) The light ray is reflected back into the medium
3H  ω2 H 
1 +
of refractive index n1 if n2 = 1
is close to  .
2  2g 
102. For a prism of prism angle θ = 60º, the
(D) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker
−1
refractive indices of the left half and the right
3H  ω2 H  half are, respectively, n1 and n2
is close to 1 +  .
4  4g  (n2 ≥ n1) as shown in the figure. The angle of
incidence i is chosen such that the incident light
99. A parallel beam of light strikes a piece of rays will have minimum deviation if n1 = n2 = n
transparent glass having cross section as shown
= 1.5. For the case of unequal refractive indices,
in the figure below. Correct shape of the
emergent wavefront will be (figures are n1 = n and n2 = n + ∆n (where ∆n << n), the
schematic and not drawn to scale)- angle of emergence e = i + ∆e. Which of the
[JEE Adv. 2020] following statement(s) is (are) correct ?
Light Glass [JEE Adv. 2021]

Air Air θ
i

(A) (B) (C) (D)

n1 n2

100. An extended object is placed at point O, 10 cm (A) The value of ∆e (in radians) is greater than
in front of a convex lens L1 and a concave lens that of ∆n.
L2 is placed 10 cm behind it, as shown in the (B) ∆e is proportional to ∆n.
figure. The radii of curvature of all the curved (C) ∆e lies between 2.0 & 3.0 milliradians, if ∆n
surfaces in both the lenses are 20 cm. The = 2.8× 10–3
refractive index of both the lenses is 1.5. The
(D) ∆e lies between 1.0 & 1.6 milliradians, if ∆n
total magnification of this lens system is
[JEE Adv. 2021] = 2.8× 10–3
L1 L2
2π
103. A rod of length 2 cm makes an angle rad with
3
O the principal axis of a thin convex lens. The lens
has a focal length of 10 cm and is placed at a
10 cm 10 cm 40
distance of cm from the object as shown in the
(A) 0.4 (B) 0.8 (C) 1.3 (D) 1.6 3

101. A wide slab consisting of two media of refractive 30 3

figure. The height of the image is cm and
indices n1 and n2 is placed in air as shown in the 13
figure. A ray of light is incident from medium n1 the angle made by it with respect to the principal
to n2 at an angle θ, where sin θ is slightly larger π
axis is α rad. The value of α is rad, where n is
n
than 1/n1. Take refractive index of air as 1. Which
________. [JEE Adv. 2022]
of the following statement(s) is(are) correct?
[JEE Adv. 2021]
air

n2

θ
n1

66
PHYSICS-X II REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE
104. List I contains four combinations of two lenses (1 O
θ
h
and 2) whose focal lengths (in cm) are indicated in Air
d µ1
the figures. In all cases, the object is placed 20 cm µ2
from the first lens on the left, and the distance h
Air
between the two lenses is 5 cm. List II contains the
n units
positions of the final images. [JEE Adv. 2022]

List-I List-II
(I) (P) Final image is
formed at 7.5

cm on the right
side of lens 2. 106. A plane polarized blue light ray is incident on a
prism such that there is no reflection from the
(II) (Q) Final image is surface of the prism. The angle of deviation of the
formed at 60.0 emergent ray is δ = 60° (see Figure-1). The angle
cm on the right of minimum deviation for red light from the same
side of lens 2. prism is δmin = 30° (see Figure-2). The refractive
index of the prism material for blue light is 3 .
(III) (R) Final image is Which of the following statement(s) is(are)
formed at 30.0 correct? [JEE Advanced 2023]
cm on the left
side of lens 2.

(IV) (S) Final image is

formed at 6.0 (A) The blue light is polarized in the plane of
cm on the right incidence.
side of lens 2. (B) The angle of the prism is 45°.
(C) The refractive index of the material of the
(T) Final image is
formed at 30.0 prism for red light is 2 .
cm on the right (D) The angle of refraction for blue light in air at
side of lens 2. the exit plane of the prism is 60°.
Which one of the following options is correct? 107. An optical arrangement consists of two concave
(A) I → P, II → R, III → Q, IV → T, mirrors M1 and M2, and a convex lens L with a
(B) I → Q, II → P, III → T, IV → S common principal axis, as shown in the figure. The
(C) I → P, II → T, III → R, IV → Q focal length of L is 10 cm. The radii of curvature
of M1 and M2 are 20 cm and 24 cm, respectively.
(D) I → T, II → S, III → Q, IV → R,
The distance between L and M2 is 20 cm. A point
object S is placed at the mid-point between L and
105. Consider a configuration of n identical units, M2 on the axis. When the distance between L and
each consisting of three layers. The first layer is M1 is n/7 cm, one of the images coincides with S.
1 The value of n is _______.[JEE Advanced 2023]
a column of air of height h = cm, and the
3
second and third layers are of equal thickness d
3 –1 3
= cm, and refractive indices µ1 =
2 2
and µ2 = 3 , respectively. A light source O is
placed on the top of the first unit, as shown in 108. In an experiment for determination of the focal
the figure. A ray of light from O is incident on length of a thin convex lens, the distance of the
the second layer of the first unit at angle of object from the lens is 10 ± 0.1 cm and the
distance of its real image from the lens is 20 ± 0.2
θ = 60° to the normal.
cm. The error in the determination of focal length
For a specific value of n, the ray of light emerges of the lens is n %. The value of n is _______.
from the bottom of the configuration at a [JEE Advanced 2023]
8
distance  = cm, as shown in the figure. The
3
value of n is _____. [JEE Advanced 2022]

67
REFR ACTION AT PLANE & CUR VED SURFACE PHYSICS-X II
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE-1
Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. D A A C B B B B C B C A B C A B B A B A
Qus. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. B C A D A B B C D C C D C C C B B B C B
Qus. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. D A C D A C B A B B C B A D A A B D D B
Qus. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
Ans. B B B C B B A C D D D C

EXERCISE-2
Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. A,C,D A,C AD B AD ABCD ACD BCD AD CD BC AB ABC A,B,C,D AB
Qus. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. BD ABCD ABD BC AC AC ABCD AC BC BC AC B A C D
Qus. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. B C A B B A A B A D B C B A B
Qus. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. C A C B D A A A C D B B A B A
Qus. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
Ans. A D B D A A C A B A

EXERCISE-3
1. (A) → (Q, S); (B) → (P, S); (C) → (Q, S); (D) → (S)
2. (A) → (P), (B) → (P), (C) → (P, R), (D) → (P, R)
3. (A) → (P); (B) → (Q); (C) → (R, T); (D) → (P, T)
4. (A) → (P, R, S); (B) → (P, Q, R, S); (C) → (P, R); (D) → (P, Q, R, S)
5. (A) → (S); (B) → (P); (C) → (R); (D) → (Q)
6. (A) → (S), (B) → (P), (C) → (P), (D) → (Q)
7. (A) → (P, Q); (B) → (P, Q, R, S); (C) → (P)
8. (A) → (S, Q); (B) → (R); (C) → (R); (D) → (P)
Qus. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Ans. 2 3 2 4 4 6 9 6 2 8 2 8 8 2 3
Qus. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Ans. 4 6 2 6 3 6 8 5 2 5 9

EXERCISE-4
Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Ans. B C B D B C A C C D D A A A B C B C
Qus. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Ans. D D A C B A B B C D A D A B 158 4.48 476 D
Qus. 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Ans. 50 5 D B D D A B C A 50 A B 5 B 3 4.00 C
Qus. 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
Ans. A C B 15 A A D 225.00 C B 15 54 C C 120 A 4 1.6
Qus. 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
Ans. B – C – 0.3 B B C B – B 6 – 2 B A C B
Qus. 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
Ans. A – A,C,D 50 C,D – – A,D A B BCD BC 6.00 A 4 A,C,D 80,150,220 1

68
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS

CHAPTER

11

WAVE OPTICS
1. WAVE NATURE OF LIGHT  The intensity at a point becomes a maximum when
Huygens’ Wave Theory φ = 2nπ (n = 0, 1, 2, . .) and there is constructive
(i) Each point on a wavefront acts as a source of interference.
new disturbance and emits its own set of  If φ = (2n − 1)π, there is destructive interference.
spherical waves called secondary wavelets. (Here n is a non-negative integer)
The secondary wavelets travel in all directions Determination of Phase Difference
with the velocity of light so long as they move The phase difference between two waves at a point
in the same medium. will depend upon
(ii) The envelope or the locus of these wavelets in (A) the difference in path lengths of the two waves
the forward direction gives the position of new from their respective sources.
wavefront at any subsequent time. (B) the refractive index of the medium
A surface on which the wave disturbance is in (C) initial phase difference, between the source, if
the same phase at all points is called a any.
wavefront. (D) Reflections, if any, in the path followed by
Wave optics involves effects that depend on the waves.
wave nature of light. In fact, it is the results of  In case of light waves, the phase difference on
interference and diffraction that prove that light account of path difference
behaves as a wave rather than a stream of particles  Optical path difference 
(as Newton believed).
= 
 λ  × 2π
Like other waves, light waves are also associated  μ(Geometrical path difference) 
with a disturbance, which one consists of = 
 λ  2 π
oscillating electric and magnetic field. The
electric field associated with a plane wave where λ is the wavelength in free space.
propagating along the x-direction can be expressed  In case of reflection, the reflected disturbance
in the form: differs in phase by π with respect to the incident
  one if the wave is incident on a denser medium
E = E o[sin(ωt - kx + φo)]
from a rarer medium. No such change of phase
where ω, k and φo bearing their usual meanings.
occurs when the wave is reflected in going from a
 Points to remember regarding Interference denser medium to a rarer medium.
 When two waves with amplitude A1 and A2 2. DOUBLE SLIT EXPERIMENT
superimpose at a point, the amplitude of resultant
 A train of plane light waves is incident on a barrier
wave is given by
containing two narrow slits separated by a distance
A= A12 + A 22 + 2A1A 2 cos ϕ 'd'. The widths of the slits are small compared
Where φ is the phase difference between the two with wavelength of the light used, so that
waves at that point. interference occurs in the region where the light
from S1 overlaps that from S2. A series of
1
 Intensity (I) = E 02 . C = speed of light, alternately bright and dark bands can be observed
2µ0C on a screen placed in this region of overlap.
E0 = electric field amplitude
P
 Intensity (I) = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I2 cosφ. S1

Hence for I to be constant, φ must be constant. d

 When φ changes randomly with time, the intensity O

= I1 + I2.
 When φ does not change with time, we get an
S2
Screen
intensity pattern and the sources are said to be
Double slit D
coherent. Coherent sources have a constant
phase relationship i.e. one that does not change The variation in light intensity along the screen
with time. near the centre O shown in the figure

aaa
69
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
Intensity Two coherent
sources
4I0 Two Incoherent
sources
One source
2I0
O I0
-5π -4π -5π -2π -π 0 +π +2π +3π +4π +5π

a bright fringe. fringe width a dark fringe.

I = Io + Io + 2 Io2 cosφ,
Now consider a point P on the screen. The phase φ
difference between the waves at P is φ, where 2π ( d sin θ )
when φ = = 4Io cos2 2
2π λ
φ= ∆Po
λ
Example-01
(where ∆Po is optical path difference, ∆Po=µ∆Pg;
∆Pg being the geometrical path difference.) A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths
2π 6500Å and 5200 Å is used to obtain interference
= [S2 P − S1P ] (here µ = 1 in air) As fringes in YDE. The distance between the slits is
λ
2.0 mm and the distance between the plane of the
As, D >> d,
slits and the screen is 120 cm.
S2P - S1P ≈ d sinθ
(i) Find the distance of the third bright fringe on
sin θ ≈ tanθ( = y/D). the screen from the central maxima for the
[for very small θ] wavelength 6500Å.
2π  dy 
Thus, φ=  
(ii) What is the least distance from the central
λ D maxima where the bright fringes due to both
the wavelengths coincide?
Solution :
P
Dλ 3×1.2m × 6500 ×10−10 m
(i) =
y3 n.= = 0.12 cm
S1
y
d 2 ×10−3 m
θ Let nth maxima of light with wavelength 6500 Å
θ coincides with that of mth maxima of 5200Å.
d O
m × 6500 Å × D n × 5200 Å × D
(ii) =
d d
S2 dsinθ
m 5200 4
⇒ = =
D n 6500 5
4.D (6500 A o )
For constructive interference, Least distance = y 4 =
d
φ = 2nπ (n = 0, 1, 2...) −10
4 × 6500 ×10 ×1.2
2π  dy  λD = = 0.16 cm
⇒  =  2nπ ⇒ y = n 2 ×10−3 m
λ D d
Similarly for destructive interference, Example-02
λD The intensity of the light coming from one of the
y = (2n − 1) (n = 1, 2, .........)
2d slits in a Young's double slit experiment is double
the intensity from the other slit. Find the ratio of
the maximum intensity to the minimum intensity in
Fringe Width W
the interference fringe pattern observed.
It is the separation of two consecutive maxima or Solution :
two consecutive minima. 2
Near the centre O [where θ is very small], Imax  l1 + l2 
= =  As I1 2I2
W = yn+1 – yn Imin  l1 − l2 
[yn gives the position of nth maxima on screen]
2
λD Imax  2 + 1 
= ⇒ =  = 34
d Imin  2 − 1 

Intensity Variation on Screen :  Displacement of Fringes

If A and Io represent amplitude of each wave and When a film of thickness 't' and refractive index 'µ'
the associated intensity on screen, then, the is introduced in the path of one of the sources,
resultant intensity at a point on the screen then fringe shift occurs as the optical path
corresponding to the angular position θ as in above difference changes.
figure, is given by Optical path difference at

70
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS

µ, t P
λ1 = 4000Å for n = 10
λ2 = 4444Å for n=9
S1 λ3 = 5000Å for n=8
λ4 = 5714Å for n=7
S2
λ5 = 6666Å for n=6

P = S2P − [S1P+ µt − t] = S2P − S1P − (µ − 1)t Example-05

= y.d/D − (µ − 1) A transparent paper (µ = 1.45) of thickness 0.02
D(µ − 1)t w mm is pasted on one of the slits of a Young’s double
⇒ nth fringe is shifted by ∆=
y = (µ − 1)t
d λ slit experiment which uses monochromatic light of
Example-03 wavelength 620 nm. How many fringes will cross
through the centre if the paper is removed?
Monochromatic light of wavelength of 600 nm is Solution:
used in a YDSE. One of the slits is covered by a Due to pasting the fringes shift which will restore its
transparent sheet of thickness 1.8 × 10–5 m made of position after removal.
a material of refractive index 1.6. How many Path difference will be
fringes will shift due to the introduction of the yd
sheet? S2P − S1P − t + µt = t (µ − 1) +
D
Solution:
⇒ for a bright fringe
w
As derived earlier, the total fringe shift = (µ − 1)t . ∆x = nλ
λ
t(µ − 1) + yd/D = nλ.
As each fringe width = w,
D
total fringe shift y = (nλ − t(µ − 1)).
The number of fringes that will shift = d
fringe width
Again after removing
w
(µ − 1)t D D
λ = (= µ − 1)t (1.6 − 1) ×1.8×10−5 m y′ = nλ ⇒ y′ − y = t(µ − 1)
= = 18 d d
w λ 600 ×10−9 m No of fringes shifted will be
Example-04 y′ − y D λD t
n= = t(µ − 1) = (µ − D)
In the YDSE conducted with white light N d d λ
(4000Å–7000Å), consider two points P1 and P2 on 0.02 × 10−3 (0.45)
= = 14.5
the screen at y1 = 0.2mm and y2 = 1.6mm, 620 × 10−9
respectively. Determine the wavelengths which
form maxima at these points 3. INTERFERENCE BY THIN FILM
P2 A ray of light incident on a thin film of thickness ‘t’
S1 y2 = 1.6mm gets partially reflected and refracted at A at surface I
d=1cm P1
y1 = 0.2mm
and thereafter it gets reflected and refracted at B of
surface II. The rays after emerging in the first medium
S2 interfere. Now the inference will depend upon the path
4m difference between AD and ABC, as beyond CD path
Solution: difference is zero.
The optical path difference at P1 is
dy1  10   G

p1 = = 5 × 10−4 mm =
 ( 0.2 ) = 5000 A
D  4000  i
i C Surface-I
A r
In the visible range 4000 – 7000Å r
r
5000 5000 E
n1 = = 1.25 =
n 2 = 0.714
x
and
4000 7000
The only integer between 0.714 and 1.25 is 1 Surface-II

∴ The wavelength which forms maxima at P is λ = 5000Å

B

For the point P2,

dy 2  10 
p2 = =   (1.6 ) =4 × 10−3 mm =
40000Å r

D  4000 
40000 40000 F

Here n1 = = 10and = n 2 = 5.71

∆ x = µ (AB + BC) – AD
4000 7000
The integers between 5.71 and 10 are 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 = µ (AE + EB + BL) – AD
∴ The wavelengths which form maxima at P2 are = µ AE–AD+µ(EB+BC) ….(i)
In ∆ LBF = BC = BF ….(ii)
aaa
71
 WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
⇒ ∆ x = µ AE – AD + µ EF (III) 4. DIFFRACTION
In ∆ ECF EF = CP cos r = 2 t cos r ….(iii)  Diffraction is the bending or spreading of waves
(IV) that encounter an object ( a barrier or an opening)
In ∆ ADC and ∆ AEC in their path.
AD AE
= sin = i and sin r
AC AC
sin i AD
⇒ = = µ ….(iv)  In Fresnel class of diffraction, the source and/or
sin r AE screen are at a finite distance from the aperture.
⇒ µ AE = AD ….(v)  In Fraunhoffer class of diffraction, the source and
Putting (iv) and (v) in (iii) we obtain screen are at infinite distance from the diffracting
∆ x = 2 µt cosr aperture. Fraunhoffer is a special case of Fresnel
diffraction.
IAD as In reflected at a denser medium it suffers
Single Slit Fraunhoffer Diffraction
an additional path difference λ/2 In order to find the intensity at point P on the screen
Total path difference the taken place is as shown in the figure the slit of width 'a' is divided
2 µ t cosr – λ / 2 into N parallel strips of width ∆x. Each strip then acts
For constructive interference as a radiator of Huygen's wavelets and produces a
characteristic wave disturbance at P, whose position
2 µ t cosr – λ / 2 = µ n.
on the screen for a particular arrangement of
⇒ 2 µ t cosr = nλ + λ/2 = (2n + 1)λ/2 maxima apparatus can be described by the angle θ.
For normal incidence r = 0 The amplitudes ∆Eo of the wave disturbances at P
⇒ 2 µ t = (2n + 1) λ / 2 = µ n from the various strips may be taken as equal if θis
2 µ t cosr – λ / 2 = (2n – 1) λ / 2 not too large.
The intensity is proportional to the square of the
⇒ 2 µ t cosr = nλ
amplitude. If Im represents the intensity at O, its
For normal incidence 2 µ t = n λ
value at P is
2
 sin α  ϕ π a sin θ
Example-06 lθ =lm   ; where α= =
 α  2 λ
White light is incident normally on a glass plate of
P
thickness 0.50 x 10-6 m and index of refraction 1.50.
Which wavelengths in the visible region (400 nm -
θ
700 nm) are strongly reflected by the plate?
θ
Solution : a
O

The light of wavelength λ is strongly reflected if the

light rays reflected are interfering constructively.
As we know the condition for constructive interference f

 1
2µt =  n +  λ. A minimum occurs when, sin α = 0 and α ≠ 0,
 2
so α = nπ, n = 1, 2, 3...
Here 2µt = 2 x 1.5 × (0.5 × 10–6)m = 1.5 × 10-6 m.
π a sin θ
 1 ⇒ = nπ ⇒ a sin θ = nλ
Putting λ = 400 nm, 1.5 × 10 =  n +  400 × 10–9
–6 λ
 2 Angular width of central maxima of diffraction
⇒ n = 3.25 pattern = 2θ1 = 2 sin–1(λ/a)
Similarly, by putting λ = 700 nm. [θ1 gives the angular position of first minima]
I
 1
1.5 × 10–6 =  n +  (700 × 10–9)
 2 
⇒ n = 1.66
Thus, within 400 nm to 700 nm, for integral values of
n = 2 and 3.
-3λ/a -2λ/a -λ/a 0 λ/a 2λ/a 3λ/a θ
Now,
4µt The concept of diffraction is also useful in
=λ = 600 nm and 429 nm are strongly reflected.
2n + 1 deciding the resolving power of optical
instruments.

72
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
Example-07 (ii) Let mth and nth bright fringe of the wavelength
coincide.
Light of wavelength 6 × 10 cm falls on a screen at a
–5
Now position mth bright fringe is
distance of 100 cm from a narrow slit. Find the
D
width of the slit if the first minima lies 1mm on ym = nλ1
either side of the central maximum. d
m λ1 5200 4
Solution: and yn = nλ2 D ⇒ = = =
Here n = 1, λ = 6 × 10–5 cm. d n λ 2 6500 5
Distance of screen from slit = 100 cm. Now
Distance of first minimum from central maxima = 0.1 cm. λD 6500 × 10−10 × 1.2
st (iii) Fringe width w = =
sinθ =
Dis tan ce of 1 min ima from the central max ima
θ1 d 2 × 10−3
Dis tan ceof the screen from the slit = 3900 × 10–7m = 0.039 cm
0.1 1
= = We know that asinθ = nλ
100 1000 Example-10
λ
a= = 0.06 cm. In YDSE light of two wavelengths of 700 nm and
θ1 500 nm. If D/d = 103 find the minimum distance
from central maxima where the maxima of two
Example-08
wavelength coincide again.
In YDSE if the source consists of two wavelengths Solution:
λ1 = 4000Å and λ2 = 4002Å . Find the distance n1 7
from the centre where the fringes disappear, if d = n1λ1 = n 2λ 2 ⇒ =
n2 5
1cm; D = 1 m .
Dλ1
Solution: y = n1 7 103 × 500 × 10−9
y =×
The fringes disappear when the maxima of λ1 fall over d
the minima of λ2. That is = 35 × 10−4 y= 3.5 mm
p p 1
− =
λ1 λ 2 2 5. POLARISATION OF LIGHT
Where p is the optical path difference at that point. Light propagates as transverse EM waves. The
λ1λ 2 magnitude of electric field is much larger as
Or p = compared to magnitude of magnetic field. We
2 ( λ 2 − λ1 )
generally prefer to describe light as electric field
Here λ1 = 4000Å, λ2 = 4002Å oscillations.
∴ p = 0.04 cm (A) Unpolarised light : In ordinary light (light from
In YDSE, p = dy/D sun, bulb etc.) the electric field vectors are
D (1000 ) 0.4 40mm distributed in all directions in a light is called
∴= y= p = ( ) unpolarised light. The oscillation of propagation of
d 10
light wave. This resolved into horizontal and
Example-09 vertical component.
A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths
6500Åand 5200Å is used to obtain interference Vertical oscillation
fringes in a Young’s double slit experiment
(i) Find the distance of the third fringe on the
screen from the central maximum for the Direction of Horizontal oscillation
propag
wavelength 6500Å. ation
(ii) What is the least distance from the central
maximum where the bright fringes due to both
wavelength coincide? (B) Polarised light : The phenomenon of limiting the
(iii) The distance between the slits is 2mm and the vibrating of electric field vector in one direction in a
distance between the plane of the slits and plane perpendicular to the direction of propagation
screen is 120cm. What is the fringe width for of light wave is called polarization of light.
λ = 6500Å? (i) The plane in which oscillation occurs in the
Solution: polarised light is called plane of oscillation.
Dλ (ii) The plane perpendicular to the plane of
(i) The width of the fringe
d oscillation is called plane of polarisation.
Then distance of the third fringe (iii) Light can be polarised by transmitting through
3Dλ 3 × 120 × 6500 × 10−8 certain crystals such as tourmaline or
3w = = = 0.117 cm polaroids.
d 0.2

aaa
73
 WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
(C) Polaroids : It is a device used to produce the plane Analyzer
Transmission axes
polarised light. It is based on the principle of Polarizer
θ
selective absorption and is more effective than the
tourmaline crystal. or Intensity = I
Amplitude = A
It is a thin film of ultramicroscopic crystals of Intensity = I0
quinine idosulphate with their optic axis parallel to Amplitude = A0
Unpolarized light
each other.
Transmission axis
(i) I = I 0 cos 2 θ and A 2 = A02 cos 2 θ ⇒ A = A0 cos θ
Detector If θ = 0 o , I = I 0 , A = A0 , If θ = 90 o , I = 0 ,
A=0

Projection of
(ii) If I i = Intensity of unpolarised light.
Unpolarized light Polarizer Transmitted E field Ii
So I 0 = i.e. if an unpolarised light is
2
converted into plane polarised light (say by
(i) Polaroids allow the light oscillations parallel to passing it through a Polaroid or a Nicol-
the transmission axis pass through them. prism), its intensity becomes half. and
Ii
(ii) The crystal or polaroid on which unpolarised I= cos 2 θ
2
light is incident is called polariser. Crystal or
6. METHODS OF PRODUCING POLARISED LIGHT
polaroid on which polarised light is incident is
(A) Polarisation by reflection : Brewster discovered
called analyser. that when a beam of unpolarised light is reflected
from a transparent medium (refractive index =µ),
Transmission axes Analyzer the reflected light is completely plane polarised at
Polarizer a certain angle of incidence (called the angle of
polarisation θ p ).
Detector
Plane polarised
reflecte
d li ht
Polarised Polarised
Unpolarised light
θP θP
l l
Unpolarized light i i 90o
µ
(A) Transmission axes of the polariser and analyser are parallel to each other, θr
so whole of the polarised light passes through analyser
Partial polarised
refracte
o d li ht
Transmission axes Analyzer
From fig. it is clear that θP + θr = 90
Also µ = tan θ p Brewster’s law
Polarizer
(i) For i < θP or i > θP
Detector
Both reflected and refracted rays becomes
partially polarised
Polarised No light (ii) For glass θ P ≈ 57 o , for water θ P ≈ 53 o
l
Unpolarized light i (B) By Dichroism : Some crystals such as tourmaline
and sheets of iodosulphate of quinine have the
(B) Transmission axis of the analyser is perpendicular to the polariser, hence
no light passes through the analyser
property of strongly absorbing the light with
vibrations perpendicular to a specific direction
(called transmission axis) transmitting the light
Malus law : This law states that the intensity of with vibrations parallel to it. This selective
the polarised light transmitted through the analyser absorption of light is called dichroism.
varies as the square of the cosine of the angle (C) By double refraction : In certain crystals, like
between the plane of transmission of the analyser calcite, quartz and tourmaline etc, incident
and the plane of the polariser. unpolarized light splits up into two light beams of
equal intensities with perpendicular polarization.

74
PHYSICS -X II WAVE OPTICS
E-ray If the optically active substance rotates the plane
of polarisation clockwise (looking against the
Unpolarized direction of light), it is said to be dextro-rotatory
li
Calicte
or right-handed. However, if the substance rotates
g O-ray
the plane of polarisation anti-clockwise, it is called
ht
laevo-rotatory or left-handed.
(i) One of the ray is ordinary ray (O-ray) it obey's The optical activity of a substance is related to the
the Snell's law. Another ray's extra ordinary asymmetry of the molecule or crystal as a whole,
ray (E-ray) it doesn't obey's the Snell's law. e.g., a solution of cane-sugar is dextro-rotatory due
(ii) Along a particular direction (fixed in the to asymmetrical molecular structure while crystals
crystal, the two velocities (velocity of O-ray vo of quartz are dextro or laevo-rotatory due to
and velocity of E-ray ve) are equal; this structural asymmetry which vanishes when quartz
direction is known as the optic axis of the is fused.
crystal (crystal's known as uniaxial crystal). Optical acZtivity of a substance is measured with
Optic axis is a direction and not any line in help of polarimeter in terms of 'specific rotation'
crystal. which is defined as the rotation produced by a
(iii) In the direction, perpendicular to the optic axis solution of length 10 cm (1 dm) and of unit
for negative crystal (calcite) ve > vo and e < o. concentration (i.e. 1 g/cc) for a given wavelength
For positive crystal ve < vo, e > o. 
(D) Nicol prism : Nicol prism is made up of calcite of light at a given temperature. i.e. [ ]to C 
L C
crystal and in it E-ray is isolated from O-ray where  is the rotation in length L at concentration C.
through total internal reflection of O-ray at canada (7) Applications and uses of polarisation
balsam layer and then absorbing it at the (i) By determining the polarising angle and using
blackened surface as shown in fig. Brewster's law, i.e.  = tanP, refractive index
Canada balsam layer
of dark transparent substance can be
E-ray determined.
(ii) It is used to reduce glare.
Unpolarized
(iii) In calculators and watches, numbers and
O-ray
li letters are formed by liquid crystals through
g
Blackened surface polarisation of light called liquid crystal
ht display (LCD).
The refractive index for the O-ray is more that for
(iv) In CD player polarised laser beam acts as needle
the E-ray. The refractive index of Canada balsam
for producing sound from compact disc which
lies between the refractive indices of calcite for the
is an encoded digital format.
O-ray and E-ray
(v) It has also been used in recording and
(5) By Scattering : It is found that scattered light in
reproducing three-dimensional pictures.
directions perpendicular to the direction of
(vi) Polarisation of scattered sunlight is used for
incident light is completely plane polarised while
navigation in solar-compass in polar regions.
transmitted light is unpolarised. Light in all other
(vii) Polarised light is used in optical stress
directions is partially polarised.
analysis known as 'photoelasticity'.
(6) Optical activity and specific rotation : When
(viii) Polarisation is also used to study
plane polarised light passes through certain
asymmetries in molecules and crystals through
substances, the plane of polarisation of the light is
the phenomenon of 'optical activity'.
rotated about the direction of propagation of light
(ix) A polarised light is used to study surface of
through a certain angle. This phenomenon is called
nucleic acids (DNA, RNA)
optical activity or optical rotation and the
substances optically active.
Polariser Analyser

Substance Laevo-rotatory

dextro-rotatory
Polarised light
Unpolarised light
Polarimeter

aaa
75
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 1
7. A transparent slab of thickness t and refractive
Based On Theory of Interference
index µ is inserted in front of upper slit of
1. Two monochromatic light waves of amplitudes YDSE apparatus. The wavelength of light used
A and 2A interfering at a point, have a phase is λ. Assume that there is no absorption of light
difference of 60º. The intensity at that point will by the slab. Mark the INCORRECT statement.
be proportional to - (A) The intensity of dark fringes will be zero, if
(A) 3A2 (B) 5A2 slits are identical
2
(C) 7A (D) 9A2 (B) The change in optical path due to insertion
of plate is µ t
2. Two coherent sources of different intensities send
(C) For marking intensity maximum at the
waves which interfere. The ratio of maximum
centre of screen, the thickness could be
intensity to the minimum intensity is 25. The
5λ
intensities of the sources are in the ratio -
(µ − 1)
(A) 25 : 1 (B) 5 : 1
(C) 9 : 4 (D) 625 : 1 (D) For marking intensity zero at the centre of
5λ
screen, the thickness could be
3. Four coherent light waves are represented by: 2(µ − 1)
(i) y = a1 sin ωt 8. Figure shows a parallel beam of light travelling
(ii) y = a2 sin (ωt + ε) in vacuum and incident on surface of medium of
(iii) y = a1 sin 2ωt refractive index µ. Mark the INCORRECT
(iv) y = a2 sin 2(ωt + ε) statement :-
Interference fringes may be observed due to Parallel beam of light
superposition of -
(A) (i) and (ii) (B) (i) and (iii)
(C) (ii) and (iv) (D) (iii) and (ii)
B

4. In a two slit experiment with white light, a white Vacuum A θ1 C

Medium θ2
fringe is observed on a screen kept behind the
D
slits. When the screen is moved away by 0.05
m, this white fringe -
(A) does not move at all
(B) gets displaced from its earlier position (A) Phase at C, φC and phase at D, φD are equal
(C) becomes coloured (B) Angle θ1 and θ2 are angles of incidence and
(D) disappears refraction respectively.
(C) AD = µ BC
5. Intensity of central bright fringe due to (D) Phase at A, φA and phase at B, φB are equal
interference of two identical coherent 9. In YDSE of equal width slits, if intensity at the
centre of screen is I0, then intensity at a distance
monochromatic sources is I. If one of the source
is switched off, then intensity of central bright of β/4 from the central maxima is (β is the
fringe width) :-
fringe becomes
I I I
(A)
I
(B)
I (A) I0 (B) 0 (C) 0 (D) 0
2 3 2 4 3
I
(C) (D) I. 10. Two loudspeakers are emitting sound waves of
4
wavelength λ with an initial phase difference of
π
6. Two identical coherent sources are placed on a . At what minimum distance from O on line
2
diameter of a circle of radius R at a separation d AB will one hear a maxima?
(d<<R, d>>λ) symmetrically about the centre of A
the circle. The sources emit identical
wavelength. The number of the points on the
3λ O
circle with maximum intensity is
2d 4d
(A) +1 (B)
λ λ 100λ B
4d 4d 100λ 25λ
(C) –2 (D) +2 (A) 25 λ (B) (C) (D) 50 λ
λ λ 15 3

76
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
11. Newton’s Rings: When a lens (n=1.5) with a n4πd  1 
1/2
π
(A) 1 − sin 2 θ  +
λ  n 2
large radius of curvature is placed on a flat plate
(n=1.5), (figure) a thin wedge-shaped film of air  2
1/2
may be produced. When the film is illuminated n4πd  1 
with monochromatic light, circular fringes, (B)  1 − 2 sin 2 θ  +π
λ  n 
called newton’s rings, can be seen. 1/2
4πd  1 
(C)  1 − 2 sin 2 θ  +π
λ  n 
1/2
4πd  1  π
(D) 1 − sin 2 θ  +
Choose the CORRECT statement :- λ  n 2  2
(A) We will have a bright central spot, and a
Based On Simple YDSE
series of bright and dark circular bands, with
increasing thickness. 15. In a certain double slit experimental
(B) We will have a dark central spot, and a arrangement, interference fringes of width 1.0
series of bright and dark circular bands, with mm each are observed when light of wavelength
increasing thickness. 5000 Å is used. Keeping the set-up unaltered if
(C) We will have a bright central spot, and a the source is replaced by another of wavelength
series of bright and dark circular bands, with 6000 Å, the fringe width will be -
(A) 0.5 mm(B) 1.00 mm (C) 1.2 mm(D) 1.5 mm
decreasing thickness. 16. In a Young's double slit experiment, the fringe
(D) We will have a dark central spot, and a width is found to be 0.4 mm. If the whole
series of bright and dark circular bands, with apparatus is immersed in water of refractive
decreasing thickness. index (4/3), without disturbing the geometrical
12. A light with wavelength (λ = 550 nm) from a arrangement, the new fringe width will be -
distant source falls normally on the surface of a (A) 0.30 mm (B) 0.40 mm
glass wedge with refractive index 1.5. A fringe (C) 0.53 mm (D) 450 microns
pattern whose neghbouring maxima on the
wedge are separated by a distance (∆x=11 µm) 17. Monochromatic green light of wavelength
is observed in reflected light. The angle between 5 × 10–7 m illuminates a pair of slits 1 mm apart.
the wedge faces is :-
The separation of bright lines in the interference
1 1
(A) rad (B) rad pattern formed on a screen 2 m away is -
30 60
1
(A) 0.25 mm (B) 0.1 mm
(C) rad (D) None of these (C) 1.0 mm (D) 0.01 mm
90
13. Figure shows two coherent microwave source S1 18. Yellow light emitted by sodium lamp in Young's
and S2 emitting waves of wavelength λ and double slit experiment is replaced by
separated by a distance 3λ. For λ <<D and y≠ 0, monochromatic blue light of the same intensity-
the minimum value of y for point P to be an (A) Fringe width will decrease
intensity maximum is (B) Fringe width will increase
(C) Fringe width will remain unchanged
(D) Fringes will become less intense
P
S1 3λ S2 y 19. The Young's double slit experiment is
performed with blue and with green light of
O wavelengths 4360 Å and 5460 Å respectively.
If X is the distance of 4th maximum from the
central one, then -
(A) X(blue) = X(green)
(B) X(blue) > X(green)
D 5 D 7 D 3 D 15 (C) X(blue) < X (green)
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2 2 X(blue) 5460
(D) =
14. Consider a ray of light incident from air onto a X(green) 4360
slab of glass (refractive index n) of width d, at
an angle θ. The phase difference between the 20. A double slit is illuminated by two wavelengths
ray reflected by the top surface of the glass and 450 nm and 600 nm. What is the lowest order at
the bottom surface is (λ is wavelength of light in which the maxima of one wavelength coincides
vacuum) with the minima of the other wavelength ?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
aaa
77
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
21. In Young's double slit experiment the light 27. Consider an YDSE that has different slits width,
emited from source has l = 6.5 × 10–7 m and the as a result, amplitudes of waves from two slits
distance between the two slits is 1 mm. Distance are A and 2A, respectively. If I0 be the
between the screen and slit is 1 metre. Distance maximum intensity of the interference pattern,
between third dark and fifth birth fringe will be then intensity of the pattern at a point where
(A) 3.2 mm (B) 1.63 mm phase difference between waves is φ, is :-
(C) 0.585 mm (D) 2.31 mm I φ
(A) I0cos2φ (B) 0 sin 2
22. In Young's double slit experiment, using 3 2
I0 I0
monochromatic light, fringe pattern shifts by a (C) [5 + 4 cos φ] (D) [5 + 8 cosφ]
certain distance on the screen when a mica sheet 9 9
of refractive index 1.6 and thichness 1.964 mm 28. In the figure shown the point S is
is introduced in the path of one of the two monochromatic source of light emitting light of
waves. If now mica sheet is removed and wavelength λ. At the point P at a distance x
distance between slit and screen is doubled, from the mirror as shown in the figure,
distance between successive max. or min. interference takes place between two light rays
remains unchanged. The wavelength of the one directly coming from source S and another
monochromatic light used in the experiment is after reflection from the mirror such that a
(A) 4000 Å (B) 5500 Å maxima is formed. The minimum value of x is
mirror
(C) 5892 Å (D) 6071 Å
23. In a Young's interference experimental x
2x P
arrangement incident yellow light is composed
of two wavelength 5890 Å and 5895 Å. between S
the slits is 1 mm and the screen is placed 1 m 500x
away. Order upto which fringes can be seen on (A) 120 λ(B) 125λ (C) 62.5λ(D) none
the screen will be
(A) 384 (B) 486 (C) 512 (D) 589 Based On Modification in YDSE
24. In a young's double slit experiment, slits are
29. The central fringe of the interference pattern
illuminated by a monochromatic source of
0
produced by light of wavelength 6000 Å is
wavelength 6000 A and fringes are obtained. If found to shift to the position of 4th bright fringe
screen is moved by a distance of 5 cm towards after a glass plate of refractive index 1.5 is
slits, change in fringe width is 3 x 10–5 m. Then introduced in path of one of beams. The
separation between the slits will be thickness of the glass plate would be -
(A) 1 mm(B) 1.2 mm (C) 1.5 mm(D) 1.63 mm (A) 4.8 µm (B) 8.23 µm
25. In Young’s double slit experiment, the fringes (C) 14.98 µm (D) 3.78 µm
are displaced by a distance x when a glass plate 30. Young’s double slit experiment is made in a
of refractive index 1.5 is introduced in the path liquid. The 10th bright fringe in liquid lies where
of one of the beams. When this plate is replaced 6th dark fringe lies in vacuum. The refractive
by another plate of the same thickness, the shift index of the liquid is approximately:
of fringes is (3/2)x. The refractive index of the (A) 1.8 (B) 1.54 (C) 1.67 (D) 1.2
second plate is
(A) 1.75 (B) 1.50 (C) 1.25 (D) 1.00 31. In the diagram shown, the separation between
26. In a YDSE, if the incident light consists of two the slit is equal to 3λ, where λ is the wavelength
wavelengths λ1 and λ2, the slit separation is d, of the light incident on the plane of the slits. A
and the distance between the slit and the screen thin film of thickness 3λ and refractive index 2
is D, the maxima due to each wavelength will has been placed in the front of the upper slit.
coincide at a distance from the central maxima, The distance of the central maxima on the
given by :- screen from O is:
λ1 + λ 2
(A)
2Dd
S1
λ1D λ D
(B) LCM of and 2
d d O
2D
(C) (λ1 – λ2)
D S2
D
λ1D λ D
(D) HCF of and 2
d d
(A) D (B) λd/D (C) λD/d (D) None

78
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
32. What happens to the fringe pattern if in the path 37. An interference is observed due to two coherent
of one of the slits a glass plate which absorbs sources ‘A’ & ‘B’ having zero phase difference
50% energy is introduced - separated by a distance 4λ along the y-axis
(A) The bright fringes become brighter and dark where λ is the wavelength of the source. A
fringes become darker detector D is moved on the positive x-axis. The
(B) No fringes are observed number of points on the x-axis excluding the
(C) The fringe width decreases points x = 0 & x = ∞ at which maximum will be
(D) None of the above observed is.
33. The double slit experiment of Young has been y
shown in figure. Q is the position of the first A
bright fringe on the right side and P is the 11th
bright fringe on the other side as measured from
If wavelength of the light used is 6000 Å, S1B, D
will be equal to - B
x

(A) three (B) four (C) two (D) infinite

S1
38. In the figure shown, a parallel beam of light is
Q
B incident on the plane of the slits of a Young’s
d O double slit experiment. Light incident on the slit,
θ = 30º S1 passes through a medium of variable
S2 refractive index µ = 1 + ax (where ‘x’ is the
distance from the plane of slits as shown), up to
P
a distance’’ before falling on S1. Rest of the
(A) 6 × 10–6 m (B) 6.6 × 10–6 m space is filled with air. If at ’O’ a minima is
(C) 3.138 × 10 m–7
(D) 3.144 × 10–7 m formed, then the minimum value of the positive
34. In a Biprism experiment, if the wavelength of constant a (in terms of  and wavelength ‘λ’ in
red light used is 6.5 × 10–7 m and that of green is air) is:
5.2 × 10–7 m, the value of n for which 
S1O = S2O

(n + 1)th green bright band coincides with the nth x

S1
red bright band for the same setting is given by -
O
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 1
S2
35. In a YDSE experiment if a slab whose refractive Screen

index can be varied is placed in front of one of λ λ

the slits then the variation of resultant intensity (A) (B)
 2
at mid-point of screen with ‘µ’ will be best
represented by (µ ≥1). [Assume slits of equal 2
(C) (D) None of these
width and there is no absorption by slab] λ
39. A plane monochromatic light falls normally on a
diaphragm with two narrow slits separated by a
I0 I0
(A) (B) distance d = 2.5 mm. A fringe pattern is formed
on the screen placed at D = 100 cm behind the
µ µ
diaphragm. If one of the slits is covered by a
µ=1 µ=1
glass plate of thickness 10 µ m, then distance by
which these fringes will be shifted will be
(A) 2 mm (B) 3 mm
I0 I0
(C) (D) (C) 4 mm (D) 5 mm

µ=1 µ µ=1 µ 40. In a Young's double–slit experiment, first

maxima is observed at a fixed point P on the
screen. Now, the screen is continuously moved
36. If the first minima in a Young’s slit experiment away from the plane of slits. The ratio of
occurs directly infront of one of the slits. intensity at point P to the intensity at point O
(distance between slit & screen D = 12 cm and (centre of the screen)
distance between slits d = 5 cm) then the
wavelength of the radiation used is : P
(A) 2 cm only (B) 4 cm only O
2 2 4 4
(C) 2cm, cm , cm (D) 4 cm, cm, cm
3 5 3 5
aaa
79
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
(A) remains constant In this case which of the following statements
(B) keeps on decreasing are true.
(C) first decreases and then increases (A) S1 and S2 must have the same intensities.
(D) first decreases and then becomes constant (B) S1 and S2 have a constant phase difference.
41. Consider the optical system shown in figure. (C) S1 and S2 must have the equal phase.
The point source of light S is having wavelength (D) S1 and S2 must have the same wavelength.
equals to λ.The light is reaching screen only
after reflection. For point P to be 2nd maxima, 44. In standard YDSE setup, a small transparent
the value of λ would be (D>>d and d>>λ) slab containing material of µ = 1.5 is placed
P
along AS2 (figure). What will be the distance
from O of the central maxima (PO = 1m) (S1S2
S
= d)

S1

P
12d 2 6d 2 3d 2 24d 2 A O
(A) (B) (C) (D)
D D D D L=
d/4 S2
42. One of the slits of a double slit system in young's
experiment is wider than the other so that the Screen
amplitude of the light reaching the central part of (A) 0.125 m above O (B) 0.125 m below O
the screen from one slit, acting alone, is twice (C) 0.25 m below O (D) 0.25 m above O
that from the other slit acting alone. Assume that 45. At a point on the screen at distance D from the
πd sin θ slits in standard YDSE experiment, 3rd maxima
β= , where d is the centre to centre
λ is observed at t = 0. Now screen is slowly
distance between the two slits and λ, the moved with constant speed away from the slits
wavelength of light used. Then Iθ, the intensity of in such a way that the centre of slits and centre
the resultant interference wave in the direction θ of screen always lie on same line and at t = 1
to central maximum on the screen will be sec, the intensity at that point is observed to be
correctly given by :- th
3
(A) Iθ = (4 I0) cos2β   of maximum intensity in between 2nd and
4
4I0
=
(B) Iθ (cos 2 β) 3rd maxima. The speed of screen is :-
9 5D 13D 17D 7D
4I0 (A) (B) (C) (D)
(C) Iθ = (1 + cos 2 β) 13 5 5 17
9
(D) Iθ = I0 [1 + 8 cos2β]
Where I0 is the intensity of the individual wave Based On Diffraction of Light
due to the narrow slit alone. 46. A slit of width a is illuminated by white light.
43. In a standard YDSE setup, two source S1 and S2 For red light (λ = 6500 Å), the first minima is
of intensity I1 and I2 are placed in front of a
obtained at θ = 30 o . Then the value of a will be
screen (figure). The pattern of intensity
distribution seen in the central portion is given (A)3250 Å (B) 6.5 × 10 −4 mm
by graph. (C) 1.24 microns (D) 2.6 × 10 −4 cm

47. The light of wavelength 6328 Å is incident on a

slit of width 0.2 mm perpendicularly, the angular
width of central maxima will be
(A) 0.36 o (B) 0.18 o
(C) 0.72 o
(D) 0.09 o
48. The bending of beam of light around corners of
obstacles is called
(A) Reflection (B)Diffraction
(C) Refraction (D) Interference
49. The penetration of light into the region of
geometrical shadow is called
(A) Polarisation (B) Interference
(C) Diffraction (D) Refraction

80
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
50. A slit of size 0.15 cm is placed at 2.1 m from a 58. A plane wavefront (λ = 6 × 10 −7 m) falls on a slit
screen. On illuminated it by a light of 0.4 mm wide. A convex lens of focal length
wavelength 5 × 10–5 cm. The width of central 0.8 m placed behind the slit focusses the light
maxima will be
(A) 70 mm (B) 0.14 mm on a screen. What is the linear diameter of
(C) 1.4 mm (D) 0.14 cm second maximum
(A) 6 mm (B) 12 mm
51. A diffraction is obtained by using a beam of red (C) 3 mm (D) 9 mm
light. What will happen if the red light is
59. A zone plate of focal length 60 cm, behaves as a
replaced by the blue light
(A) Bands will narrower and crowd full together convex lens, If wavelength of incident light is
(B) Bands become broader and further apart 6000 Å, then radius of first half period zone will
(C) No change will take place be
(D) Bands disappear (A) 36 × 10 −8 m. (B) 6 × 10 −8 m.
52. What will be the angle of diffracting for the first (C) 6 × 10 −8 m. (D) 6 × 10 −4 m.
minimum due to Fraunhoffer diffraction with
sources of light of wave length 550 nm and slit 60. Radius of central zone of circular zone plate is
of width 0.55 mm 2.3 mm. Wavelength of incident light is 5893 Å.
(A) 0.001 rad (B) 0.01 rad Source is at a distance of 6 m. Then the distance
(C) 1 rad (D) 0.1 rad of first image will be
53. Angular width (β) of central maximum of a (A) 9 m (B) 12 m (C) 24 m (D) 36 m
diffraction pattern on a single slit does not 61. Red light is generally used to observe
depend upon diffraction pattern from single slit. If blue light
(A) Distance between slit and source is used instead of red light, then diffraction
(B) Wavelength of light used pattern
(C) Width of the slit (A) Will be more clear
(D) Frequency of light used (B) Will contract
(C) Will expanded
54. A single slit of width 0.20 mm is illuminated (D) Will not be visualized
with light of wavelength 500 nm. The observing
screen is placed 80 cm from the slit. The width 62. In the experiment of diffraction at a single slit, if
of the central bright fringe will be the slit width is decreased, the width of the
(A) 1 mm (B) 2 mm central maximum
(C) 4 mm (D) 5 mm (A) Increases in both Fresnel and Fraunhofer
55. Yellow light is used in single slit diffraction diffraction
experiment with slit width 0.6 mm. If yellow (B) Decreases both in Fresnal and Fraunhofer
light is replaced by X-rays then the pattern will diffraction
reveal (C) Increases in Fresnel diffraction but decreases
(A) That the central maxima is narrower in Fraunhofer diffraction
(B) No diffraction pattern (D) Decreases in Fresnel diffraction but
(C) More number of fringes increases is Fraunofer diffraction.
(D) Less number of fringes
63. Conditions of diffraction is
56. Which statement is correct for a zone plate and a a a
(A) =1 (B) >> 1
lens λ λ
(A) Zone plate has multi focii whereas lens has a
(C) << 1 (D) None of these
one λ
(B) Zone plate has one focus whereas lens has 64. Light of wavelength 589.3 nm is incident
multiple focii
(C) Both are correct normally on the slit of width 0.1 mm. What will
(D) Zone plate has one focus whereas a lens has be the angular width of the central diffraction
infinite maximum at a distance of 1 m from the slit
(A) 0.68° (B) 1.02°
57. In Fresnel diffraction, if the distance between (C) 0.34° (D) None of these
the disc and the screen is decreased, the intensity
65. The phenomenon of diffraction of light was
of central bright spot will
discovered by
(A) Increase (B) Decrease
(A) Hygens (B) Newton
(C) Remain constant (D) None of these
(C) Fresnel (D) Grimaldi

aaa
81
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II

Based On Polarization of Light 74. Out of the following statements which is not
correct
66. A polariser is used to (A) When unpolarised light passes through a
(A) Reduce intensity of light Nicol's prism, the emergent light is
(B) Produce polarised light elliptically polarised
(C) Increase intensity of light (B) Nicol's prism works on the principle of
(D) Produce unpolarised light double refraction and total internal reflection
(C) Nicol's prism can be used to produce and
67. Light waves can be polarised as they are analyse polarised light
(A) Transverse (B) Of high frequency (D) Calcite and Quartz are both doubly
(C) Longitudinal (D) Reflected refracting crystals

68. Through which character we can distinguish the 75. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a
light waves from sound waves glass plate at an angle of incidence equal to
(A) Interference (B) Refraction Brewster's angle φ . If µ represents the
(C) Polarisation (D) Reflection
refractive index of glass with respect to air, then
the angle between reflected and refracted rays is
69. The angle of polarisation for any medium is 60o,
(A) 90 + φ (B) sin −1 (µ cos φ )
what will be critical angle for this
(C) 90o (D) 90 o − sin −1 (sin φ / µ )
(A) sin −1 3 (B) tan −1 3
1
(C) cos −1 3 (D) sin −1 76. Figure represents a glass plate placed vertically on
3 a horizontal table with a beam of unpolarised light
falling on its surface at the polarising angle of 57o
70. The angle of incidence at which reflected light is with the normal. The electric vector in the
totally polarized for reflection from air to glass reflected light on screen S will vibrate with respect
(refraction index n) is to the plane of incidence in a
1
(A) sin −1 (n) (B) sin −1  
n
1
(C) tan −1   (D) tan −1 (n)
n
57° 57°
S

71. Which of following can not be polarised (A) Vertical plane

(A) Radio waves (B) Ultraviolet rays (B) Horizontal plane
(C) Infrared rays (D) Ultrasonic waves (C) Plane making an angle of 45o with the vertical
(D) Plane making an angle of 57o with the
horizontal
72. A polaroid is placed at 45o to an incoming light
of intensity I 0 . Now the intensity of light 77. A beam of light AO is incident on a glass slab
passing through polaroid after polarisation (µ = 1.54) in a direction as shown in figure. The
would be reflected ray OB is passed through a Nicol prism
on viewing through a Nicole prism, we find on
(A) I 0 (B) I 0 / 2 (C) I 0 / 4 (D) Zero
rotating the prism that
B
A N
73. Plane polarised light is passed through a
polaroid. On viewing through the polaroid we 33° 33°
find that when the polariod is given one O
complete rotation about the direction of the
light, one of the following is observed
(A) The intensity is reduced down to zero and
(A) The intensity of light gradually decreases to
remains zero
zero and remains at zero
(B) The intensity of light gradually increases to (B) The intensity reduces down some what and
a maximum and remains at maximum rises again
(C) There is no change in intensity (C) There is no change in intensity
(D) The intensity of light is twice maximum and (D) The intensity gradually reduces to zero and
twice zero then again increases

82
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
78. Polarised glass is used in sun glasses because 83. When light is incident on a doubly refracting
(A) It reduces the light intensity to half an crystal, two refracted rays-ordinary ray (O-ray)
account of polarisation and extra ordinary ray (E-ray) are produced.
(B) It is fashionable Then
(C) It has good colour (A) Both O-ray and E-ray are polarised
(D) It is cheaper perpendicular to the plane of incidence
(B) Both O-ray and E-ray are polarised in the
79. In the propagation of electromagnetic waves the plane of incidence
angle between the direction of propagation and (C) E-ray is polarised perpendicular to the plane
plane of polarisation is of incidence and O-ray in the plane of
(A) 0o (B) 45o (C) 90o (D) 180o incidence
(D) E-ray is polarised in the plane of incidence
80. The transverse nature of light is shown by and O-ray perpendicular to the plane of
(A) Interference of light incidence
(B) Refraction of light
(C) Polarisation of light 84. Light passes successively through two
(D) Dispersion of light polarimeters tubes each of length 0.29m. The
first tube contains dextro rotatory solution of
81. A calcite crystal is placed over a dot on a piece concentration 60kgm–3 and specific rotation
of paper and rotated, on seeing through the 0.01rad m2kg–1. The second tube contains laevo
calcite one will be see rotatory solution of concentration 30kg/m3 and
(A) One dot specific rotation 0.02 radm2kg–1. The net
(B) Two stationary dots rotation produced is
(C) Two rotating dots (A) 15° (B) 0° (C) 20° (D) 10°
(D) One dot rotating about the other

82. A light has amplitude A and angle between

analyser and polariser is 60°. Light is reflected
by analyser has amplitude
(A) A 2 (B) A / 2
(C) 3 A / 2 (D) A / 2

aaa
83
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II

EXERCISE # 2
One or More Than One Correct Answer (A) the intensities at the screen due to the two
Question slits are 5 units and 4 units respectively
Type Questions (B) the intensities at the screen due to the two
1. If white light is used in a Young’s double-slit slits can be 4 units and 1 unit respectively
experiment - (C) the amplitude ratio is 3
(A) bright white fringe is formed at the centre of (D) the amplitude ratio is 2
the screen 6. While light is incident normally on a glass plate
(B) fringes of different colours are observed of thickness 5000 Å and refractive index 1.5.
clearly only in the first order The wavelength in the visible region (4000 Å to
(C) the first-order violet fringes are closer to the 7000 Å) that are strongly reflected by the plate
centre of the screen than the first order red is -
fringes (A) 4290 Å (B) 6000Å
(D) the first-order red fringes are closer to the (C) 4000Å (D) 5000Å
centre of the screen than the first order violet 7. A parallel beam of light (λ = 5000 Å) is incident
fringes at an angle α = 30° with the normal to the slit
2. In Young’s double slit experiment the two slits plane in a young’s double slit experiment.
are covered by slabs of same thickness but Assume that the intensity due to each slit at any
refractive index 1.4 and 1.7. If slit to screen point on the screen is I0. Point O is equidistant
separation is 1 m and slits are at 1 mm separation from S1 & S2. The distance between slits is
using a coherent source of wavelength 4000 Å 1mm.
and the central fringe shifts to the 3rd bright
fringe position, then - S1
S α
(A) shift will be towards slab of index 1.7 by 1.2 • S2
O
mm
(B) shift will be towards slab of index 1.4 by 1.2 3m

mm (A) the intensity at O is 4I0

(C) slabs are of thickness 4 µm (B) the intensity at O is zero
(D) slabs are of thickness 4 Å (C) the intensity at a point on the screen 4m
from O is 4I0
3. A thin film of index 1.6 is placed in air and (D) the intensity at a point on the screen 4m
white light reflected from it is viewed. The from O is zero
wavelengths 432 nm, 540 nm and 120 nm are 8. Two monochromatic coherent point sources S1
missing. Then - and S2 are separated by a distance L. Each
(A) the thickness of film is 675 nm source emits light of wavelength λ, where L >>
(B) only 617 nm will be maximum reflected λ. The line S1 S2 when extended meets a screen
wavelength lying in visible region perpendicular to it at a point A.
(C) if the order of 432 nm is 5, the order of (A) The interference fringes on the screen are
540 nm is 4 circular in shape
(D) order cannot be found from the given (B) The interference fringes on the screen are
information straight lines perpendicular to the line S1 S2 A
(C) The point A is an intensity maxima if
4. White light is used to illuminate the two slits in
L = nλ
a Young’s double slit experiment. The
(D) The point A is always an intensity maxima
separation between slits is b and the screen is at for any separation L
a distance d (>> b) from the slits. At a point on
the screen directly in front of one of the slits, 9. In an interference arrangement, similar to
certain wavelengths are missing. Some of these Young's double slit experiment, the slits S1 and
missing wavelengths are - S2 are illuminated with coherent microwave
(A) λ = b2/d (B) λ = 2b2/d sources, each of frequency 106 Hz. The sources
(C) λ = b /3d
2
(D) λ = 2b2/3d are synchronized to have zero phase difference.
The slits are separated by distance d = 150.0 m.
5. In the Young’s double slit experiment, the The intensity I(θ) is measured as a function of θ,
interference pattern is found to have an intensity where θ is defined as shown in Fig. If I0 is
ratio between bright and dark fringes as 9. This maximum intensity, then I(θ) for 0 ≤ θ ≤ 90º is
implies that - given by –

84
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
S1 13. In a young’s double slit experiment, the slits are
d illuminated by monochromatic light. The entire
2 θ set up is immersed in pure water. In order to
d restore the original fringe width, what can be
2 done?
(A) The slits can be brought closed together.
S2
(B) The screen can be moved away from the slit
(A) I(θ) = (I0) for θ = 0º plane.
(B) I(θ) = (I0 /2) for θ = 30º (C) The incident light can be replaced by that of
(C) I(θ) = (I0 /4) for θ = 90º a longer wavelength.
(D) A thin transparent slab can be introduced in
(D) I(θ) is constant for all values of θ front of one of the slits.
10. The figure shows two points source which emit 14. Consider the situation shown in the figure. Two
light of wavelength λ in phase with each other slits S1 and S2 are placed symmetrically about the
line OP which is perpendicular to screen. The
and are at a distance d = 5.5 λ apart along a line
space between screen and slits is filled with a
which is perpendicular to a large screen at a liquid of refractive index µ3. A plate of thickness t
distance L from the centre of the source. and refractive index µ2 is placed in front of one of
Assume that d is much less than L. Which of the the slit. A source S is placed above OP at a
following statement is (are) correct? distance d. Choose the correct alternatives.
Screen
µ3
S air
d S1

O P
(A) Five bright fringes appear on the screen air S µ3
2 µ2
(B) Six bright fringes appear on the screen
D 2D
(C) Point y = 0 corresponds to bright fringe
[(Given that D = 1m, d = 2 mm, t = 6 × 10–6 m,
(D) Point y = 0 corresponds to dark fringe.
µ2 = 1.2, µ3 = 1.8]
11. If one of the slits of a standard YDSE apparatus (A) Position of central maxima from point P is
is covered by a thin parallel sided glass slab so 2 mm
that it transmit only one half of the light (B) Position of central maxima from point P is
intensity of the other, then : 2
mm
(A) the fringe pattern will get shifted towards 9
the covered slit. (C) Thickness of glass slab so that central
20
(B) the fringe pattern will get shifted away from maxima forms at point P is × 10–6m
3
the covered slit. (D) If glass slab is removed, the central maxima
(C) the bright fringes will be less bright and the shifts by a distance of 2 mm
dark ones will be more bright. 15. In a YDSE setup, we plot the phase difference
(D) the fringe width will remain unchanged. (f) between both waves at point P on the screen
against the angular position (q) of point P on the
12. A double-slit apparatus is set up and green light screen. The graph is as shown below.
is used to form the interference pattern. The P 4π
green light is then replaced by red light. Which S1 φ
θ
of the following changes may allow the spacing
θ π/2
Screen

of the bright bands on the screen to remain S2

unaffected by the change of light colour ?
(Given that the distance between the slits is d (A) The distance S1S2 = 2l
and that between the plane of the slits and the (B) There are a total of 4 minima on the screen
screen is D) :- (C) The first maxima above the centre is at
(A) Decrease 'D' π
θ=
(B) Increase 'd' 4
(C) Increase 'd' and decrease 'D' π
(D) At θ = , intensity is maximum
(D) Increase the brightness of the light source 6

aaa
85
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
16. Bright and dark fringes are seen on a screen y
when light of wavelength λ, from a single
source reaches at two narrow slits of width w air Screen
n=1 O
and a short distance d apart. The number of x
fringes per unit length on the screen can be d
halved, s
(A) if the distance between the slits is changed D y'
to
d 20. The y-coordinate of second order bright
d' =
2 (maxima) formed on the screen is :-
(B) if the wavelength is changed to λ' = 2λ
(C) if the distance between the slits is changed to (A) 250 µm (B) 500 µm
d (C) –250 µm (D) –500µm
d' = & the wavelength is changed to λ' =
2
21. The region on screen where interference pattern
4λ
is formed lies in :-
(D) only if the width of the slits is changed to w' =
2w (A) – ∞ < y < + 1 (B) – ∞ < y < 0
(C) 1(m) < y < 0 (D) 0 < y < –1(m)
Question Passage Based Type Questions
Passage # 1 (Q. 17 to Q.19) 22. The minimum horizontal distance of screen
In a YDSE set–up (see figure), the light source executes from fixed source such that at least one bright is
SHM between P and Q according to the equation formed on screen:-
x =A sinωt, S being the mean position. Assume d→0 (A) 1mm (B) 2 mm
and A<<L. ω is small enough to neglect Doppler effect. (C) 1 cm (D) 1 m
If the source were stationary at S, intensity at O would
be I0. Passage # 3 (Q. 23 to Q.25)
In a Young’s double slit experiment, a parallel beam of
S1 light of wavelength 4000 Å is incident on the slit at an
angle of 30o as shown in the figure.
x screen
O
P S Q Point of central
maximum O
30o 10mm
S2

17. The fractional change in intensity of the central

1m
maximum as function of time is
A sin ωt 2A sin ωt
(A) (B)
L L 23. Find fringe width of the interference pattern
3A sin ωt 4A sin ωt (A) 40 µm (B) 20 µm
(C) (D)
L L (C) 30 µm (D) 10 µm

18. When the source comes towards the point Q, 24. Find phase difference between the light coming
(A) the bright fringes will be less bright from the two slits at O.
(B) the dark fringes will no longer remain dark (A) zero (B) π/2 (C) π/6 (D) π/4
(C) the fringe width will increase
(D) none of these 25. Find the position of centre bright fringe on
screen.
19. The fringe width β can be expressed as (A) 50 cm (B) 30 cm
(A) β = β0 sinωt (B) β=β0 cos ωt (C) 40 cm (D) 45 cm
(C) β = β0 sin2ωt (D) none of these
Passage # 4 (Q. 26 to Q.28)
The figure shows a double-slit experiment in which
Passage # 2 (Q. 20 to Q.22)
A monochromatic point source S of wavelength coherent monochromatic light of wavelength λ from a
distant source is incident upon the two slits, each of
λ =5000Å (in water) is placed at distance d = 1mm
below surface of transparent liquid as shown in figure. width w (w >> λ) and the interference pattern is
A very large screen is placed along y-axis at horizontal viewed on a distant screen. A thin piece of glass of
distance D = 1m from point source. (Neglect partial thickness t and refractive index n is placed between
reflection of rays from source S at liquid-air interface). one of the slit and the screen; perpendicular to the light
path. Intensity at P for t = 0 is given is I0.

86
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS

λ=6000Å
0.15°
S

30cm
140cm
26. The intensity at a point P as a function of t is
π 
π 
(A) I0sin2  λ (n − 1)t 
32. The focal length of the lens is :-
(B) I0cos2  (n − 1)t 
λ  (A)
120
cm
 π   π  7
(C) I0cos2  (n –1)t  (D) I0sin2  (n –1)t  240
 2λ   2λ  (B) cm
7
27. The intensity at P is minimum if the value of t is (C) Data not sufficient
(A) λ/n (B) λ/{2(n – 1)} (D) None of these
(C) λ/(n – 1) (D) 2λ/(n – 1)
33. Gap between two position of the lens is :-
28. If the width w of one of the slits is increased to (A) 80 cm (B) 60 cm
2w, the maximum intensity at P for t = 0 is (C) 40 cm (D) 20 cm
(A) (3/2)I0 (B) (9/2)I0
34. Refractive index of the prism material is
3 1 
(C) (9/4)I0 (D)  +  I0 approximately :-
4 2 (A) 1.46 (B) 1.56
(C) 1.66 (D) 1.76
Passage # 5 (Q. 29 to Q.31)
In a modified Young’s double slit experiment, there 35. The fringe width of the pattern on screen (after
are three identical parallel slits S1, S2 and S3. A the lens has been removed) is :-
coherent monochromatic beam of wavelength 700 nm, (A) 0.7 m (B) 0.35 mm
having plane wavefronts, falls on the slits. The (C) 1.4 mm (D) None
intensity of the central point O on the screen is found
to be I0 W/m2. The distance S1S2 = S2S3 = 0.7 mm and
screen is 30 cm from slits. 36. The total number of fringes obtained on the
screen
29. Find the intensity on the screen at O if S1 and S3 4400 400
(A) (B)
are covered. 7 7
I I I I 44
(A) (B) (C) (D) (C) (D) None
7 7 6 6 7

30. Find the intensity on the screen at O if only S3 is Passage # 7 (Q. 37 to Q.39)
covered. A radio transmitter consists of two vertical
transmitting aerials T and T' separated by distance d.
3I 3I 3I I It has been constructed so that citizens of city A can
(A) (B) (C) (D)
7 7 7 2 receive radio program but those at city B are unable to
31. All three slits are now uncovered and a transparent do so. Both aerials transmit radio signals of equal
plate of thickness 1.4 µm and refractive index 1.25 amplitude of S; T is leading T' in phase by δ. The cities
is placed in front of S2. Resultant intensity at point A and B are at a considerable distance from the
O is transmitter.
(A) 3I/7 (B) 4I/7
(C) 5I /7 (D) 6I /7 towards A
T
θ 2φ towards B
Passage # 6 (Q. 32 to Q.36) d
Refracting angles of biprism are both 0.15°. Distance
of biprism from source is 30 cm. Distance between
source and screen is 140 cm. The Fresnel's biprism T'
arrangement shown in the figure uses a source of light
of wavelength 6000Å. When a converging lens is The angle between T'T and the direction of A is θ, as
moved between the biprism and the screen two images indicated in the diagram. This angle can be varied by
of S are focused on the screen for two positions of the changing the direction of TT'. The angle between the
lens. The separations between the two images for the
directions of cities A and B is 2φ as indicated in the
two positions are found to be 0.9 mm and 1.6 mm
diagram. All angles are expressed in radians.
aaa
87
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
37. What is the path difference between transmitters 42. If the mirror is shifted towards left then how
T and T' at city A. does the fringe pattern on screen change?
(A) d sinθ (B) d cosθ (A) fringe width decreases and the region in
(C) d sin(θ + φ) (D) d cos (θ + φ) which interference is formed shifts
downward
38. The radio signals reaching city A interfere (B) fringe width decreases and the region in
constructively with Nth order interference. which interference is formed shift upwards
Choose the CORRECT relation between the (C) fringe width does not change and the region
known physical quantities for this occurrence :- in which interference is formed shifts
λδ upwards
(A) d cosθ = Nλ (B) d cosθ – =Nλ (D) fringe width does not change and the region
2π
λδ λδ in which interference is formed shifts
(C) d cosθ + = N λ (D) = Nλ downward
2π 2π

39. Choose the correct relation between the known Passage # 9 (Q.43 to Q.45)
A convex lens of focal length f = 10 cm is cut through
physical quantities for quantities for destructive
a optical axis into two semicircular halves. In doing so,
interference of the radio signals reaching city B,
glass of 0.5 mm thickness is lost. The two halves are
so that no signal is detected at B.
then joined together. This lens is placed symmetrically
λδ  1
(A) d cosθ – =  M + λ 5 cm in front of a slit which is illuminated with light of
2π  2 wavelength λ = 5000Å. A screen is placed on the other
λδ  1 side of the lens at a distance of 90 cm from the lens,
(B) d cos (θ + 2φ) – =  M + λ
2π  2 perpendicular to the optical axis of the lens.
λδ  1
(C) d cos θ + =  M +  λ
2π  2 S
λδ  1
(D) d cos (θ + 2φ) + =  M +  λ
2π  2
5cm 90 cm
Passage # 8 (Q.40 to Q.42)
In a Lloyd’s mirror experiment a narrow slit S is
transmitting a light of wavelength λ is placed 3 mm 43. What is the distance between two images of S?
above a small plane mirror (as shown). The light 1
(A) mm (B) 1 mm
coming directly from the slit and that coming after the 2
reflection interfere at a screen placed at a distance of 1 3
(C) mm (D) mm
90 cm from the slit. Length of mirror is 2mm and the 4 2
middle point of mirror is 2mm from point P.
S 44. What is the fringe width on the screen?
1 3
(A) mm (B) mm
A B 2 4
P O
M 5
(C) 1 mm (D) mm
screen

45. Total number of maximas on the screen are

40. If fringe width is 0.1 mm then what is the
wavelength of light used? (A) 5 (B) 4 (C) 2 (D) 7
(A) 3.3 × 10-7 m (B) 6.6 × 10–7 m
–7
(C) 1.0 × 10 m (D) 4 × 10–7 m

41. If fringe width is 0.1 mm, then the number of

fringes obtained on the screen is
(A) 1400 (B) 2697
(C) 26970 (D) 18000

88
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS

EXERCISE # 3
Question Column Match Type Questions Column I Column II
(A) Plane of image (P)
1. Given below in column I, different
move towards
modifications, that has been introduced in the
screen if | f |
standard Young's double slit experiment. Match
is increased
the effect given in column II with the
Small portion of each
modifications correctly. [Assume other things
part near pole is
remain same]
removed. The
Column I Column II
remaining parts are
(A) Change in frequency (P) Fringe width joined.
of light (keeping
(B) Images formed (Q)
power of source
will be virtual
constant)
(B) Insertion of non- (Q) Distance of 1st
absorbing thin glass maxima &
slab in front of one minima from The two parts are
slit. central maxima. separated slightly.
(C) Changing the (R) Position of central The gap is filled by
medium between slit maxima. opaque material.
& screen (C) Interference (R)
(D) Changing the width (S) Intensity of pattern can be
of one slit. maxima & obtained if
minima screen is suitably
positioned. The two parts are
separated slightly.
2. Two point monochromatic source of light is free
The gap is filled by
to move in a circle of radius 1 mm in
opaque material.
anticlockwise direction without any external
(S)
torque with angular velocity of π/4 rad/sec. In
column I various times are given and in column
II the coordinate is given (here zeroth maxima /
minima is a point where path difference is zero Small portion of each
and last maxima/minima is the point when path part near pole is
difference is maximum). Given wavelength of removed. The
light used = 5000 Å and neglect Doppler's effect remaining parts are
screen

4. A parallel beam of visible light consisting of

wavelengths λ1 and λ2 is incident on a standard
(0, 0)
YDSE apparatus with d = 1 mm, D = 1m. P is a
1m point on the screen at a distance y from center of
Column I Column II screen O. At y = y1 is the nearest point above O
(A) t = 0, zeroth maxima (P) (1 m, 0) where the two maxima coincide and at y = y2 is
is at the nearest point above O where the two minima
(B) t = 0, last maxima is (Q) (1 m, –∞)
coincide. β1 & β2 are fringe width corresponding
at
(C) t = 2, first maxima is (R) (1 m, 0.25 m) to wave length λ1 and λ2
at
(D) t = 2, thousandth (S) (1 m, 250 µm)
maxima is at
P
(T) None of these
y
d=1mm
3. Light from source S (| u | < | f |) falls on lens and
screen is placed on the other side. The lens is
formed by cutting it along principal axis into
two equal parts and are joined as indicated in D=1m
column II.
aaa
89
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
Column I Column II
(A) β1 = 0.3 (P) The 2nd nearest point S1
mm, above O there two maxima S P
β2 = 0.5 mm coincide is y = 2y1 S2

(B) β1 = 0.3 mm, (Q) y2 has no finite value

β2 = 0.4 mm
(C) β1 = 0.2 mm, (R) The 2nd nearest point 10. A glass plate 12 × 10–3 mm thick is placed in the
β2 = 0.4 mm above O where the two path of one of the interfering beams in a
minima coincide is y = 3y2 Young's double slit interference arrangement
(S) y1 = LCM of β1 and β2 using monochromatic light of wavelength
6000Å. If the central band shifts a distance
5. In the standard YDSE apparatus shown in equal to width of 10 bands. What is the
figure; ∆x is the path difference between S2P & thickness (in µm) of the plate of diamond of
S1P. Now a glass slab is introduced in front of refractive index 2.5 that has to be introduced in
S2. Then match the following :- the path of second beam to bring the central
P band to original position?
S1
O 11. Two coherent narrow slits emitting wavelength
S2 λ= 500 nm in the same phase are placed at (0, 0, 0)
and (3λ, 0, 0) in an x-y-z space as shown in the
Column-I Column-II figure. The light from the two slits interfere on a
(A) ∆x at P will (p) Increases screen S which is parallel to y-z plane and is
(B) Fringe width will (Q) Decreases placed at a distance D= 2m from the origin. The
(C) Fringe pattern will (R) Remain same distance of the nearest point on the screen from
(D) Number of fringes (S) Shift upward the centre of the screen P, where intensity is
between O & P will equal to that at P is y m. then find the value of y2
(T) Shift downward screen(S)

Question Numerical Type Questions y

y
6. In YDSE, number of maximas can be obtained
on screen if wavelength of light used is 200 nm x
3λ P
and z
d = 700 nm. D
7. In YDSE, λ for red light is 7800 Å and for blue
light, λ is 5200Å. Find the value of n for which 12. White light is incident normally on a thin sheet
nth bright band due to red light coincides with of plastic film in air. The reflected light has a
(n+1)th bright due to blue light. minima for λ = 512 nm and λ = 640 nm in the
visible spectrum. What is the minimum
8. Two monochromatic and coherent point sources thickness (in µm) of the film? (Given : µ = 1.28)
of light, S1 and S2 of wavelength 4000 Å, are
13. The YDSE apparatus is modified by placing an
placed at a distance 4mm from each other. The
isotropic transparent plate of high melting point
line joining the two sources is perpendicular to in front of one of the slits. The refractive index
screen. The distance of the midpoint of S1S2 of the plate is µr = 1.5 at room temperature and
from the screen is D = √2m. Find the radius (in its thickness is t = 2 µm. The refractive index of
cm, non-zero value) of the smallest bright ring plate will increase when temperature increases
on the screen, using valid assumptions. and temperature coefficient of refractive index
of the plate (i.e., the fractional change in
9. In a YDSE experiment two slits S1 and S2 have refractive index per unit rise in temperature) is 3
separation of d = 2 mm. The distance of the × 10–3/°C. The incident light is having
screen is D = 8/5 m. Source S starts moving wavelength λ = 6000 Å. The separation between
from a very large distance towards S2 the slits is d = 0.2 cm, and separation between
perpendicular to S1S2 as shown in figure. The the slit and the screen is 2m. If the plate is
wavelength of monochromatic light is 500 nm. heated so that it temperature rises by 100°C,
The number of maximas observed on the screen then how many fringes will cross a particular
at point P as the source moves towards S2 is point on the screen ? (Neglect the thermal
3995 + n. Find the value of n. expansion of plate) :-

90
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
14. In a typical Young's double slit experiment a 18. Solar cell devices that generate electricity when
point source of monochromatic light is kept as exposed to sunlight are often coated with a
shown in the figure. If the source is given an transparent thin film of silicon monoxide (SiO,
instantaneous velocity v=1 mm per second refractive index = 2) to minimize the reflective
towards the screen, then the instantaneous losses from the surface. A silicon solar cell
velocity of central maxima is given as α × 10–β (n = 3.5) is coated with a thin film of silicon
cm/s upward in scientific notation. Find the monoxide of thickness 60 nm. As an engineer,
value of α+β. you have to coat an addition layer of silicon

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
monoxide film so that reflection is least for a
wave of wavelength 880 nm, then the minimum
1cm

P thickness of additional coat is (x × 102) Å. Find

0.5cm
the value of x.
screen
source
50cm
D=1m
19. The outer surface of a transparent glass slab of
refractive index µS = 1.5 is coated by a thin
15. Two coherent sources S1 and S2 separated by layer of transparent medium of refractive index
distance 2λ emit light of wavelength λ in phase as µc = 1.6. Orange light of wave length 6400 Å
shown in the figure. A circular wire of radius 100λ fall normally on the coat. The reflected light at
is placed in such a way that S1S2 lies in its plane the upper surface and at the lower surface of the
and the mid-point of S1S2 is at the centre of wire. coat interfere distructively. If thickness of the
The angular positions on the wire for which
coat is
intensity reduces to half of its maximum value for
5K × 10–8 m, calculate the minimum value of K.
the first time is given as θ. Find the value of 32
cosθ.
20. A narrow light beam is incident on a plane-
17
parallel plate having a refractive index of n =
16
at an angle of 30° to the normal from air. As a
result it is partially reflected and refracted. The
refracted beam is reflected by the rear surface of
16. Each light source (S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6) in a line the plate and then undergoes refraction again,
has same power, same wavelength (λ) and all emerging from the plate with a displacement of
are in phase. Distance between consecutive 4 3 cm parallel to the primary reflected beam.
sources is a if smallest value of a is a' such that The thickness of the plate is given as ‘t’ m. Find
point P(r>>a) has zero light intensity, find the
the value of 40 t .
λ
value of .
3a 21. The intensity received at the focus of the lens is I
P when no glass slab has been placed in front of the
slit. Both the slits are of the same dimension and
the plane wavefront incident perpendicularly on
r them, has wavelength λ. On placing the glass
slab, the intensity reduces to 3I/4 at the focus.
30° Find out the minimum thickness of the glass slab
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 (in 1000Å) if its refractive index is 3/2. Given λ =
6000Å, µ = 1.5.
17. AB is a plane mirror and S is a monochromatic
point source of light having wavelength 4000Å.
The total no of fringes formed on screen is 3N.
Find N ?

S Screen
1 mm
A B

20cm 30cm 50cm

aaa
91
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
22. Figure shows two coherent microwave source S1 24. In standard YDSE, if intensity of the two slits S1
and S2 emitting waves of wavelength λ and and S2 be I0 and 4I0 respectively, then the
separated by a distance 3λ. For λ <<D and y≠ 0, Imax
intensity ratio will be.
the minimum value of y for point P to be an Imin
mD
intensity maximum is . Determine the
n 25. In Young's double slits experiment parallel
value of m + n, if m and n are coprime numbers. monochromatic electromagnetic waves of
wavelength 3 × 10–5 m fall on the slits at an
angle of 30° with the normal to the plane of slits
P as shown in the figure. A transparent sheet of
S1 3λ S2 y
thickness 5 × 10–5 m and refractive index 1.5 is
O introduced near the slit S1. The distance between
the two slits is 0.5 mm and the distance between
the plane of slits and the screen is 1m. Find the
y-coordinate (in cm) of the closest maxima to
the origin on the positive y-axis.
23. In a Young’s double slit experiment, a parallel y
beam of light of wavelength 6000 Å is incident S1
9°
on the slit at an angle of as shown in the
π
figure. Find phase difference between the light 30°
O
coming from the two slits at O. If your answer is
0.5mm
10 π
N write the value of N. S2
3
Screen 1m
30°

9° 0.1mm O
π

1m

92
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS

EXERCISE # 4
Question Previous Year (JEE Main) 7. The speed of the light in the medium is :-
(A) maximum on the axis of the beam
1. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference
(B) minimum on the axis of the beam
we require two sources which emit radiations (C) the same everywhere in the beam
of- [AIEEE - 2003] (D) directly proportional to the intensity I
(A) nearly the same frequency
(B) the same frequency 8. As the beam enters the medium, it will :
(C) different wavelength (A) travel as a cylindrical beam
(D) the same frequency and having a definite (B) diverge (C) converge
phase relationship (D) diverge near the axis and converge near the
periphery
2. The maximum number of possible interference
maxima for slit-separation equal to twice the 9. At two points P and Q on screen in Young's
wavelength in Young's double-slit experiment, double slit experiment, waves from slits S1 and
is- [AIEEE - 2004] λ
S2 have a path difference of 0 and
(A) infinite (B) five 4
(C) three (D) zero respectively. The ratio of intensities at P and Q
3. A Young's double slit experiment uses a will be :
monochromatic source. The shape of the [AIEEE - 2011]
interference fringes formed on a screen is- (A) 3 : 2 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 4 : 1
[AIEEE - 2005]
(A) hyperbola (B) circle 10. In a Young's double slit experiment, the two
(C) straight line (D) parabola slits act as coherent sources of waves of equal
amplitude A and wavelength λ. In another
4. In a Young's double slit experiment the intensity
experiment with the same arrangement the two
λ
at a point where the path difference is (λ slits are made to act as incoherent sources of
6 waves of same amplitude and wavelength. If the
being the wavelength of the light used) is I. If I0 intensity at the middle point of the screen in the
denotes the maximum intensity, I/I0 is equal to- first case is I1 and in the second case I2, then the
[AIEEE - 2007] I1
ratio is :- [AIEEE-2011]
1 3 1 3 I2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2 4 (A) 4 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 0.5
5. A mixture of light, consisting of wavelength 590 11. Direction : The question has a paragraph
nm and an unknown wavelength, illuminates followed by two statement, Statement-1 and
Young's double slit and gives rise to two statement-2. Of the given four alternatives after
overlapping interference patterns on the screen. the statements, choose the one that describes the
The central maximum of both lights coincide. statements.
Further, it is observed that the third bright fringe A thin air film is formed by putting the convex
of known light coincides with the 4th bright surface of a plane-convex lens over a plane glass
fringe of the unknown light. From this data, the plate. With monochromatic light, this film gives
wavelength of the unknown light is :- an interference pattern due to light reflected
[AIEEE - 2009] from the top (convex) surface and the bottom
(A) 442.5 nm (B) 776.8 nm (glass plate) surface of the film
(C) 393.4 nm (D) 885.0 nm [AIEEE-2011]
Statement-1: When light reflects from the air-
Direction : Questions (Q.6 to Q.8) are based on the glass plate interface, the reflected wave suffers a
following paragraph. phase change of π.
An initially parallel cylindrical beam travels in a Statement-2: The centre of the interference
medium of refractive index µ(I) = µ0 + µ2I, where µ0 pattern is dark.
and µ2 are positive constants and I is the intensity of (A) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true and
the light beam. The intensity of the beam is decreasing Statement-2 is not the correct explanation of
with increasing radius. [AIEEE - 2010] Statement-1.
(B) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true
6. The initial shape of the wavefront of the beam is :- (C) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false
(A) planar (B) convex (C) concave (D) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true and
(D) convex near the axis and concave near the Statement-2 is the correct explanation of
periphery statement-1.
aaa
93
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
12. In Young's double slit experiment, one of the slit 17. The angular width of the central maximum in a
is wider than other, so that the amplitude of the single slit diffraction pattern is 60°. The width
light from one slit is double of that from other of the slit is 1µm. The slit is illuminated by
slit. If Im be the maximum intensity, the resultant monochromatic plane waves. If another slit of
same width is made near it, Young’s fringes can
intensity I when they interfere at phase
be observed on a screen placed at a distance 50
difference φ is given by : {AIEEE-2012] cm from the slits. If the observed fringe width is
Im φ I 1 cm, what is slit separation distance? (i.e.,
(A) (1 + 8cos2 ) (B) m (4 + 5cosφ)
9 2 9 distance between the centres of each slit.)
Im 2 φ Im φ [JEE Main 2018]
(C) (1 + 2cos ) (D) (1 + 4cos2 )
3 2 5 2 (A) 75 µm (B) 100 µm
(C) 25 µm (D) 50 µm
13. Two coherent point sources S1 and S2 are
separated by a small distance 'd' as shown. The 18. Two coherent sources produce waves of
fringes obtained on the screen will be : different intensities which interfere. After
[JEE Mains-2013] interference, the ratio of the maximum intensity
to the minimum intensity is 16. The intensity of
d the waves are in the ratio: [JEE Main–2019]
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 25 : 9
S1 S2
D Screen (C) 16 : 9 (D) 5 : 3

(A) points (B) straight lines 19. In a Young's double slit experiment, the slits are
(C) semi-circles (D) concentric circles placed 0.320 mm apart. Light of wavelength λ=
500 nm is incident on the slits. The total number
14. On a hot summer night, the refractive index of of bright fringes that are observed in the angular
range −30° ≤ θ ≤ 30° is: [JEE Main–2019]
air is smallest near the ground and increases
(A) 321 (B) 320 (C) 641 (D) 640
with height from the ground. When a light beam
is directed horizontally, the Huygens’ principle 20. In a Young's double slit experiment with slit
leads us to conclude that as it travels, the light separation 0.1 mm, one observes a bright fringe
beam : [JEE Mains-2015] 1
at angle rad by using light of wavelength λ1.
(A) goes horizontally without any deflection 40
(B) bends downwards When the light of wavelength λ2 is used a bright
(C) bends upwards fringe is seen at the same angle in the same set
(D) becomes narrower up. Given that λ1 and λ2 are in visible range
(380 nm to 740 nm), their values are :
15. In a Young’s double slit experiment, slits are [JEE Main–2019]
separated by 0.5 mm, and the screen is placed (A) 400 nm, 500 nm (B) 380 nm, 525 nm
150 cm away. A beam of light consisting of two (C) 625 nm, 500 nm (D) 380 nm, 500 nm
wavelengths, 650 nm and 520 nm, is used to
obtain interference fringes on the screen. The 21. Consider a Young's double slit experiment as
least distance from the common central shown in figure. What should be the slit
maximum to the point where the bright fringes separation d in terms of wavelength λ such that
due to both the wavelengths coincide is the first minima occurs directly in front of the slit
[JEE Mains-2017] (S1)?
(A) 1.56 mm (B) 7.8 mm
(C) 9.75 mm (D) 15.6 mm

16. Unpolarized light of intensity I passes through

an ideal polarizer A. Another identical polarizer
B is placed behind A. The intensity of light
beyond B is found to be I / 2. Now another [JEE Main–2019]
identical polarizer C is placed between A and B. λ λ
(A) (B)
The intensity beyond B is now found to be I / 8. 2( 5 − 2) ( 5 − 2)
The angle between polarizer A and C is : λ λ
(C) (D)
[JEE Main 2018] 2(5 − 2) (5 − 2)
(A) 45° (B) 60° (C) 0° (D) 30°

94
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
22. In a Young's double slit experiment, the path 29. A system of three polarizers P1, P2, P3 is set up
difference, at a certain point on the screen, such that the pass axis of P3 is crossed with
1 respect to that of P1. The pass axis of P2 is
between two interfering waves is th of
8 inclined at 60° to the pass axis of P3. When a
wavelength. The ratio of the intensity at this beam of unpolarized light of intensity I0 is
point to that at the centre of a bright fringe is incident on P1, the intensity of light transmitted
close to : [JEE Main–2019] by the three polarizers Ls I. The ratio (I0/I)
(A) 0.94 (B) 0.85 (C) 0.80 (D) 0.74 equals (nearly): [JEE Main–2019]
(A) 5.33 (B) 10.67 (C) 1.80 (D) 16.00
23. In a double-slit experiment, green light (5303 Å) 30. Interference fringes are observed on a screen by
falls on a double slit having a separation of illuminating two thin slits 1 mm apart with a
19.44 µm and a width of 4.05 µm. The number light source (λ = 632.8 nm). The distance
of bright fringes between the first and the between the screen and the slits is 100 cm. If a
second diffraction minima is :- bright fringe is observed on a screen at a
[JEE Main–2019] distance of 1.27 mm from the central bright
(A) 10 (B) 05 (C) 09 (D) 04 fringe, then the path difference between the
24. In an interference experiment the ratio of waves, which are reaching this point from the
a1 1 slits is close to : [JEE Main–2020]
amplitude of coherent waves is = . The ratio (A) 1.27 m (B) 2 nm
a2 3
(C) 2.87 nm (D) 2.05 m
of maximum and minimum intensities of fringes 31. In a Young's double slit experiment, 16 fringes
will be [JEE Main–2019] are observed in a certain segment of the screen
(A) 4 (B) 9 (C) 2 (D) 18 when light of wavelength 700 nm is used. If the
25. Diameter of the objective lens of a telescope is wavelength of light is changed to 400 nm, the
250 cm. For light of wavelength 600 nm. number of fringes observed in the same segment
coming from a distant object, the limit of of the screen would be : [JEE Main–2020]
resolution of the telescope is close to: (A) 28 (B) 24 (C) 18 (D) 30
[JEE Main–2019] 32. In a Young's double slit experiment, light of
(A) 4.5 × 10–7 rad (B) 1.5 × 10–7 rad 500nm is used to produce an interference
(C) 2.0 ×10–7 rad (D) 3.0 ×10–7 rad pattern. When the distance between the slits is
0.05 mm, the angular width (in degree) of the
26. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the ratio of fringes formed on the distance screen is close to
the slit’s width is 4 : 1. The ratio of the intensity [JEE Main–2020]
of maxima to minima, close to the central fringe (A) 0.07° (B) 0.17° (C) 1.7° (D) 0.57°
on the screen, will be : [JEE Main–2019] 33. Two light waves having the same wavelength λ
(A) 9 : 1 (B) 25 : 9 in vacuum are in phase initially. Then the first
(C) 4 :1 (D) ( 3 + 1)4 :16 wave travels a path L1 through a medium of
refractive index n1 while the second wave
27. In a double slit experiment, when a thin film of travels a path of length L2 through a medium of
thickness t having refractive index µ is refractive index n2. After this the phase
introduced in front of one of the slits, the difference between the two waves is:
maximum at the centre of the fringe pattern [JEE Main–2020]
shifts by one fringe width. The value of t is (λ is
2π 2π  L2 L1 
the wavelength of the light used) (A) (n1L1 − n2 L2 ) (B)  − 
[JEE Main–2019] λ λ  n1 n2 
λ λ 2π  L1 L2  2π
(A) (B)
(2µ − 1) (µ − 1) (C)  −  (D) (n2 L1 − n1L2 )
λ  n1 n2  λ
λ 2λ
(C) (D) 34. A beam of plane polarised light of large cross
2(µ − 1) (µ − 1)
sectional area and uniform intensity of 3.3 Wm–2
falls normally on a polariser (cross sectional
28. The value of numerical aperature of the
objective lens of a microscope is 1.25. If light of area 3 × 10–4 m2) which rotates about its axis
wavelength 5000 Å is used, the minimum with an angular speed of 31.4 rad/s. The energy
separation between two points, to be seen as of light passing through the polariser per
distinct, will be [JEE Main–2019] revolution, is close to : [JEE Main–2020]
(A) 0.48 µm (B) 0.24 µm –5
(A) 1.0 × 10 J (B) 5.0 × 10–4 J
(C) 0.12 µm (D) 0.38 µm (C) 1.0 × 10–4 J (D) 1.5 × 10–4 J
aaa
95
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II

35. Orange light of wavelength 6000 × 10–10 m in 40. A polarizer - analyser set is adjusted such that
the intensity of light coming out of the analyser
illuminates a single slit of width 0.6 × 10–4 m. is just 10% of the original intensity. Assuming
The maximum possible number of diffraction that the polarizer - analyser set does not absorb
minima produced on both sides of the central any light, the angle by which the analyser need
maximum is ______. [JEE Main–2020] to be rotated further to reduce the output
intensity to be zero, is [JEE Main–2020]
36. Two coherent sources of sound, S1 and S2, (A) 60° (B) 18.4° (C) 45° (D) 71.6°
produce sound waves of the same wavelength, 41. In a Young's double slit experiment, the
λ = 1 m, in phase. S1 and S2 are placed 1.5 m separation between the slits is 0.15 mm. In the
apart (see fig.) A listener, located at L, directly in experiment, a source of light of wavelength 589
front of S2 finds that the intensity is at a minimum nm is used and the interference pattern is
observed on a screen kept 1.5 m away. The
when he is 2m away from S2. The listener moves separation between the successive bright fringes
away from S1, keeping his distance from S2 fixed. on the screen is: [JEE Main–2020]
The adjacent maximum of intensity is observed (A) 5.9 mm (B) 3.9 mm
when the listener is at a distance d from S1. Then, (C) 1.9 mm (D) 2.3 mm
d is : [JEE Main–2020] 42. In a double slit experiment, at a certain point on
the screen the path difference between the two
2m
S2
interfering waves is (1/8)th of a wavelength. The
2m L ratio of the intensity of light at that point to that
1.5m d at the centre of a bright fringe is :
S1
[JEE Main–2020]
(A) 0.568 (B) 0.672 (C) 0.760 (D) 0.853
(A) 12m (B) 3m (C) 5m (D) 2m
43. A source of light is placed in front of a screen.
37. In the figure below, P and Q are two equally Intensity of light on the screen is I. Two Polaroid
intense coherent sources emitting radiation of P1 and P2 are so placed in between the source of
wavelength 20 m. The separation between P and light and screen that the intensity of light on screen
Q is 5 m and the phase of P is ahead of that of Q is I/2. P2 should be rotated by an angle of ___
by 90°. A, B and C are three distinct points of (degrees) so that the intensity of light on the screen
observation, each equidistant from the midpoint becomes 3I/8. [JEE MAIN 2021]
of PQ. The intensities of radiation at A, B, C
will be in the ratio: [JEE Main–2020] 44. White light is passed through a double slit and
B interference is observed on a screen 1.5 m away.
The separation between the slits is 0.3 mm. The
first violet and red fringes are formed 2.0 mm
P Q and 3.5 away from the central white fringes.
A
C The difference in wavelengths of red and violet
(A) 0 : 1 : 2 (B) 4 : 1 : 0 light is ___ nm. [JEE MAIN 2021]
(C) 0 : 1 : 4 (D) 2 : 1 : 0 45. The light waves from two coherent sources have
38. A Young's double-slit experiment is performed same intensity I1 = I2 = I0. In interference pattern
using monochromatic light of wavelength λ. the intensity of light at minima is zero. What will
The intensity of light at a point on the screen, be the intensity of light of maxima?
where the path difference is λ, is K units. The [JEE MAIN 2021]
intensity of light at a point where the path (A) 5I0 (B) I0 (C) 4 I0 (D) 2 I0
λ nK 46. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are
difference is is given by , where n is an
6 12 separated by 0.3 mm and the screen is 1.5 m away
integer. The value of n is ________ . from the plane of slits. Distance between fourth
[JEE Main–2020] bright fringes on both sides of central bright fringe
is 2.4 cm. The frequency of light used is ___
× 1014 Hz. [JEE MAIN 2021]
39. Visible light of wavelength 6000 × 10–8 cm 47. A bandwidth of 6 MHz is available for A.M.
falls normally on a single slit and produces a transmission. If the maximum audio signal
diffraction pattern. It is found that the second frequency used for modulating the carrier wave is
diffraction minimum is at 60° from the central not to exceed 6 kHz. The number of stations that
maximum. If the first minimum is produced at can be broadcasted within this band
θ1, then θ1 is close to [JEE Main–2020] simultaneously without interfering with each other
(A) 25° (B) 20° (C) 30° (D) 45° will be _____. [JEE MAIN 2021]

96
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
48. The width of one of the two slits in a Young’s 52. Sun light falls normally on a surface of area 36
double slit experiment is three times the other slit. cm2 and exerts an average force of 7.2 × 10–9 N
within a time period of 20 minutes. Considering
If the amplitude of the light coming from a slit is a case of complete absorption, the energy flux
proportional to the slit-width, the ratio of of incident light is [JEE MAIN 2022]
(A) 25.92 × 102 W/cm2 (B) 8.64 × 10–6 W/cm2
minimum to maximum intensity in the interference (C) 6.0 W/cm2 (D) 0.06 W/cm2
pattern is x : 4 where x is [JEE MAIN 2021]
53. In a double slit experiment with monochromatic
light, fringes are obtained on a screen placed at
49. Identify the correct statements from the some distance from the plane of slits. If the
following descriptions of various properties of screen is moved by 5 × 10–2 m towards the slits,
electromagnetic waves. [JEE MAIN 2022] the change in fringe width is 3 × 10–3 cm. If the
(A) In a plane electromagnetic wave electric distance between the slits is 1 mm, then the
field and magnetic field must be wavelength of the light will be _______ nm.
perpendicular to each other and direction of [JEE MAIN 2022]
propagation of wave should be along
electric field or magnetic field. 54. Nearly 10% of the power of a 110 W light bulb
is converted to visible radiation. The change in
(B) The energy in electromagnetic wave is
average intensities of visible radiation, at a
divided equally between electric and distance of 1 m from the bulb to a distance of 5
magnetic fields. m is a × 10–2 W/m2. The value of 'a' will be
(C) Both electric field and magnetic field are [JEE MAIN 2022]
parallel to each other and perpendicular to
the direction of propagation of wave. 55. An unpolarised light beam of intensity 2I0 is
(D) The electric field, magnetic field and passed through a polaroid P and then through
another polaroid Q which is oriented in such a
direction of propagation of wave must be
way that its passing axis makes an angle of 30°
perpendicular to each other. relative to that of P. The intensity of the
(E) The ratio of amplitude of magnetic field to emergent light is [JEE MAIN 2022]
the amplitude of electric field is equal to I0 I0 3I 3I
(A) (B) (C) 0 (D) 0
speed of light. 4 2 4 2
Choose the most appropriate answer from the
options given below 56. Two light beams of intensities 4I and 9I
(A) (D) only (B) (B) and (D) only interfere on a screen. The phase difference
between these beams on the screen at point A is
(C) (B), (C) and (E) only
zero and at point B is π. The difference of
(D) (A), (B) and (E) only resultant intensities, at the point A and B, will
be _________I. [JEE MAIN 2022]
50. Two coherent sources of light interfere. The
intensity ratio of two sources is 1 : 4. For this 57. When a beam of white light is allowed to pass
through convex lens parallel to principal axis, the
I +I
interference pattern if the value of max min different colours of light converge at different
I max − I min
point on the principle axis after refraction. This is
2α + 1 α called [JEE (Main) 2023]
is equal to , then will be-
β+3 β (A) Spherical aberration
[JEE MAIN 2022] (B) Chromatic aberration
(A) 1.5 (B) 2 (C) 0.5 (D) 1 (C) Polarisation
(D) Scattering
51. Two beams of light having intensities I and 4I
58. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the intensities
interfere to produce a fringe pattern on a screen.
λ λ
The phase difference between the two beams are at two points, for the path differences and
4 3
π π
and at points A and B respectively. The (λ being the wavelength of light used) are I1 and I2
2 3 respectively. If I0 denotes the intensity produced
difference between the resultant intensities at by each one of the individual slits, then individual
the two points is xl. The value of x will I +I
slits, then 1 2 = ______ . [JEE (Main) 2023]
be______. [JEE MAIN 2022] I0
aaa
97
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
59. Two polaroids A and B are placed in such a way 64. Two light waves of wavelengths 800 and 600
that the pass-axis of polaroids are perpendicular nm are used in Young’s double slit experiment
to each other. Now, another polaroid C is placed to obtain interference fringes on a screen placed
7 m away from plane of slits. If the two slits are
between A and B bisecting angle between them. separated by 0.35 mm, then shortest distance
If intensity of unpolarized light is I0 then from the central bright maximum to the point
intensity of transmitted light after passing where the bright fringes of the two wavelength
through polaroid B will be : [JEE (Main) 2023] coincide will be _____ mm. [JEE (Main) 2023]
I I I Question Previous Year (JEE Advanced)
(A) 0 (B) zero (C) 0 (D) 0
8 4 2 65. Two beams of light having intensities I and 4 I
60. A travelling wave is described by the equation interfere to produce a fringe pattern on a screen.
The phase difference between the beams is π/2
y(x, t) = [0.05 sin (8x – 4t)] m The velocity of
at point A and π at point B. Then the difference
the wave is: [all the quantities are in SI unit] between the resultant intensities at A and B is –
[JEE (Main) 2023] [IIT - 2001]
–1
(A) 8 ms (B) 0.5 ms–1 (A) 2 I (B) 4 I (C) 5 I (D) 7 I
(C) 4 ms–1 (D) 2 ms–1 66. A vessel ABCD of 10 cm width has two small
slits S1 and S2 sealed with identical glass plates
61. In Young’s double slit experiment, two slits S1
of equal thickness. The distance between the
and S2 are ‘d’ distance apart and the separation
slits is 0.8 mm. POQ is the line perpendicular to
from slits to screen is D (as shown in figure).
the plane AB passing through O, the middle
Now if two transparent slabs of equal thickness point of S1 and S2. A monochromatic light
0.1 mm but refractive index 1.51 and 1.55 are
source is kept at S, 40 cm below P and 2 m from
introduced in the path of beam (λ = 4000 Å)
the vessel, to illuminate the slits as shown in the
from S1 and S2 respectively. The central bright
figure below. Calculate the position of the
fringe spot will shift by _____________ number central bright fringe on the other wall CD with
of fringes. [JEE (Main) 2023] respect to the line O [IIT – 2001]
A
D
S1

P S2 O
40 cm Q

S 2m 10cm

B C
62. ‘n’ polarizing sheets are arranged such that each
Now, a liquid is poured into the vessel and filled
makes an angle 45° with the proceeding sheet. up to O The central bright fringe is found to be at
An unpolarized light of intensity I is incident Calculate the refractive index of the liquid.
into this arrangement. The output intensity is 67. In the ideal double-slit experiment, when a
I glass-plate (refractive index 1.5) of thickness t is
found to be . The value of n will be -
64 introduced in the path of one of the interfering
[JEE (Main) 2023] beams (wavelength λ), the intensity at the
position where the central maximum occurred
(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 5 previously remains unchanged. The minimum
63. Match List I with List II: [JEE (Main) 2023] thickness of the glass-plate is – [IIT - 2002]
(A) 2λ (B) 2λ/3 (C) λ/3 (D) λ
List-I List-II 68. In the adjacent diagram, CP represent a
(A) Microwaves (I) Physiotherapy wavefront and AO and BP the corresponding
two rays of beam. Find the condition on θ for
(B) UV rays (II) Treatment of cancer constructive interference at P between the ray
(C) Infra-red light (III) Lasik eye surgery BP and reflected ray OP - [IIT - 2003]
O R
(D) X-ray (IV) Aircraft navigation
θ θ
Choose the correct answer from the options C d

given below: A
P
(A) A-IV, B-I, C-II, D-III
B
(B) A-III, B-II, C-I, D-IV 3λ λ
(C) A-II, B-IV, C-III, D-I (A) cos θ = (B) cos θ =
2d 4d
(D) A-IV, B-III, C-I, D-II λ 4λ
(C) sec θ – cos θ = (D) sec θ – cos θ =
d d

98
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
69. A mixture of light waves having wavelength 75. Speed of light is
560 nm & 400 nm falls normally on a YDSE
setup. The distance between the slits is 0.1 mm (A) the same in medium –1and medium –2
and the distance of the screen from the slits is 1 (B) larger in medium –1 than in medium –2
m. Distance between two successive total dark
regions is - [IITScr. - 2004] (C) larger in medium –2 than in medium –1
(A) 4 mm (B) 14 mm (D) different at b and d
(C) 5.6 mm (D) 28 mm
70. In Young's double slit experiment mixture of 76. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the
two light wave having wavelengths λ1 = 500 nm
separation between the two slits is d and the
and λ2 = 700 nm are being used. Find the
position next to central maxima, where maximas wavelength of the light is λ. The intensity of
due to both waves coincides. light falling on slit 1 is four times the intensity
D
(Given = 1000 ) [IIT – 2004] of light falling on slit 2. Choose the correct
d
71. Coherent electron beam is being used in YDSE. choice(s). [IIT - 2008]
On increasing kinetic energy of the electrons, (A) If d = λ, the screen will contain only one
fringe width will - [IITScr. - 2005]
(A) increases (B) decrease maximum
(C) remain unchanged
(B) If λ < d < 2λ, at least one more maximum
(D) No interference pattern will be observed on
the screen (besides the central maximum) will be
72. In YDSE experiment, intensity at some point is
observed on the screen
1/4th of the maximum intensity then angular
position of this point is (d : separation between (C) If the intensity of light falling on slit 1 is
the slits & λ is the wavelength of light) –
reduced so that it becomes equal to that of
[IITScr. - 2005]
(A) sin–1 λ/d (B) sin–1λ/2d slit 2, the intensities of the observed dark
(C) sin–1λ/3d (D) sin–1λ/4d and bright fringes will increase
Paragraph for Question Nos. 73 to 75
(D) If the intensity of light falling on slit 2 is
The figure shows surface XY separating two
transparent media, medium -1 and medium -2. The increased so that it becomes equal to that of
lines ab and cd represent wavefronts of a light wave
slit 1, the intensities of the observed dark
travelling in medium -1 and incident on XY. The lines
ef and gh represent wavefronts of the light wave in and bright fringes will increase
medium -2 after refraction. [IIT - 2007]
b d 77. Column I shows four situations of standard
medium-1 Young's double slit arrangement with the screen
a c placed far away from the slits S1 and S2. In each
X Y
f h
of these cases S1P0 = S2P0, S1P1 – S2P1 = λ/4 and
e g medium-2
S1P2 – S2P2 = λ/3, where λ is the wavelength of
73. Light travels as a the light used. In the cases B, C and D, a
(A) parallel beam in each medium transparent sheet of refractive index µ and
(B) convergent beam in each medium
(C) divergent beam in each medium thickness t is pasted on slit S2. The thicknesses
(D) divergent beam in one medium and of the sheets are different in different cases. The
convergent beam in the other medium
phase difference between the light waves
74. The phases of the light wave at c, d, e and f are reaching a point P on the screen from the two
φc, φd, φe and φf respectively. It is given that
φc ≠ φf : slits is denoted by δ(p) and the intensity by I(p).
(A) φc cannot be equal to φd Match each situation given in Column I with
(B) φd can be equal to φe
(C) (φd – φf) is equal to (φc – φe) the statement(s) in Column II valid for that
(D) (φd – φc) is not equal to (φf – φe) situation. [IIT – 2009]
aaa
99
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II
Column I 81. A Young’s double slit interference arrangement
S2 P2 with slits S1 and S2 is immersed in water
P1 (refractive index = 4/3) as shown in the figure.
(A) P0 The positions of maxima on the surface of water
S1 are given by x2 = p2m2λ2 – d2, where λ is the
wavelength of light in air (refractive index = 1),
S2 P2 2d is the separation between the slits and m is an
P1
(B) (µ – 1)t = λ/4 integer. The value of p is[JEE Advanced-2015]
P0

S1 S1
d x Air
S2 P2 d
P1 S2
( (C) (µ – 1)t = λ/2 P0
Water

S1
82. While conducting the Young’s double slits
P2 experiment, a student replaced the two slits with
S2
P1 a large opaque plate in the x-y plane containing
(D) (µ – 1)t = 3λ/4 P0 two small holes that act as two coherent point
sources (S1, S2) emitting light of wavelength 600
S1 nm. The student mistakenly placed the screen
parallel to the x-z plane (for z > 0) at a distance
Column II
D = 3m from the mid-point of S1S2, as shown
(P) δ(P0) = 0 schematically in the figure. The distance
(Q) δ(P1) = 0 between the sources d = 0.6003 mm. The origin
(R) I(P1) = 0 O is at the intersection of the screen and the line
(S)I(P0) > I(P1) joining S1S2. Which of the following is (are)
(T)I(P2) > I(P1) true of the intensity pattern on the screen ?
78. Young's double slit experiment is carried out by [JEE Advanced-2016]
using green, red and blue light, one color at a
Screen
time. The fringe width recorded are βG, βR and
z
βB, respectively Then [IIT - 2012]
O
(A) βG > βB > βR (B) βB > βG > βR y
S1 d S2
(C) βR > βB > βG (D) βR > βG > βB x
79. In the Young’s double slit experiment using a D
monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the path (A) Hyperbolic bright and dark bands with foci
difference (in terms of an integer n) symmetrically placed about O in the x-
corresponding to any point having half the peak direction
intensity is – [JEE Advanced-2013] (B) Straight bright and dark bands parallel to the
λ λ
(A) (2n + 1) (B) (2n + 1) x-axis
2 4 (C) Semi circular bright and dark bands centered
λ λ
(C) (2n + 1) (D) (2n + 1) at point O
8 16
(D) The region very close to the point O will be
80. A light source, which emits two wavelengths dark
λ1 = 400 nm and λ2 = 600 nm, is used in a 83. Two coherent monochromatic point sources
Young’s double slit experiment. If recorded S1 and S2 of wavelength λ = 600 nm are placed
fringe widths for λ1 and λ2 are β1 and β2 and the symmetrically on either side of the center of the
number of fringes for them within a distance y circle as shown. The sources are separated by a
on one side of the central maximum are m1 and distance d = 1.8 mm. This arrangement produces
m2, respectively, then [JEE Advanced-2014] interference fringes visible as alternate bright
(A) β2 > β1 and dark spots on the circumference of the
(B) m1 > m2 circle. The angular separation between two
(C) From the central maximum, 3rd maximum of consecutive bright spots on the circumference of
λ2 overlaps with 5th minimum of λ1. the circle. He angular separation between two
(D) The angular separation of fringes for l1 is consecutive bright spots is ∆θ. Which of the
greater than λ2. options is/are correct ? [JEE Advanced-2017]

100
PHYSICS-X II WAVE OPTICS
P1
Medium 1
∆θ

P2
S1 S2
d n1
(A) The angular separation between two d n2
consecutive bright spots decreases as we θ
move from P1 to P2 along the first quadrant.
(B) At P2 the order of the fringe will be
maximum. Medium 2
Detector
(C) A dark spot will be formed at the point P2.
(D) The total number of fringes produced Which of the following statements (s) is (are)
between P1 and P2 in the first quadrant is correct ?
close to 3000 (A) The phase difference between the two rays
84. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slit in independent of d.
separation d is 0.3 mm and the screen distance D (B) The two rays interfere constructively at the
is 1 m. A parallel beam of light of wavelength detector.
600 nm incident on the slits at angle α as shown (C) The phase difference between the two rays
in figure. On the screen, the point O is depends on n1 but is independent of n2.
equidistant from the slits and distance PO is (D) The phase difference between the two rays
11.0 mm. Which of the following statement(s) vanishes only for certain values of d and
is/are correct ? [JEE Advanced-2019] the angle of incidence of the beam with q
Screen being the corresponding angle of refraction
P
86. A monochromatic light wave is incident normally
α d x
O on a glass slab of thickness d, as shown in the
D figure. The refractive index of the slab increases
(A) For α = 0, there will be constructive linearly from n1 to n2 over the height h. Which of
interference at point P. the following statement(s) is(are) true about the
0.36 light wave emerging out of the slab?
(B) For α = degree, there will be
π
destructive interference at point P.
0.36
(C) For α = degree, there will be
π
destructive interference at point O.
(D) Fringe spacing depends on α.
85. A double slit setup is shown in the figure. One
of the slits is in medium 2 of refractive index n2.
The other slit is at the interface of this medium (A) It will deflect up by an angle tan–1
with another medium 1 of refractive index n1 (≠
n2). The line joining the slits is perpendicular to 
( )
 n 22 − n12 d 

[JEE Advanced-2023]
the interface and the distance between the slits is  2h 
d. The slit widths are much smaller than d. A (B) It will deflect up by an angle tan–1
monochromatic parallel beam of light is incident
on the slits from medium 1. A detector is placed  (n 2 − n1 )d 
 
in medium 2 at a large distance from the slits,  h 
and at an angle θ from the line joining them, so (C) It will not deflect.
that θ equals the angle of refraction of the beam.
Consider two approximately parallel rays from (D) The deflection angle depends only on (n2 – n1)
the slits received by the detector. and not the individual values of n1 and n2.
[JEE Advanced-2022]

aaa
101
WAVE OPTICS PHYSICS-X II

ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE-1
Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. C C A A C B B C B C D B A B C A C A C D
Qus. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. B C D A A B C B A A A D A C C A A B A C
Qus. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. A D A B A C A B C C A A A C B A B A D A
Qus. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Ans. B A A A D B A C D D D B D A C A D A A C
Qus. 81 82 83 84
Ans. D D D B

EXERCISE-2

Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A,B,C A,C A,B,C A,C B,D A,B A,C A,C A,B A,D A,C,D A,B,C A,B,C B,C A,B,D A,B B D D D
Qus. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. D A A A A B B D B C A B D D A C B C D B
Qus. 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. D C A C A

EXERCISE-3
1.(A) → (P,Q) ; (B) → (R) ; (C) → (P,Q) ; (D) → (S) 2. (A) → (Q); (B) → (P); (C) → (S); (D) → (T)
3.(A) → (P,Q); (B) → (P,Q,R,S); (C) → (P) 4. (A) → (P,R,S); (B) →(P,Q,S); (C) → (P, Q, S)
5. (A) → (P) ; (B) → (R) ; (C) → (T) ; (D) → (R)
6.(7) 7.(B) 8.(B) 9.(5) 10.(D) 11.(5) 12. (A) 13. (A) 14. (5) 15. (D) 16. (3)
17.(05) 18.(5) 19.(D) 20.(C) 21.(B) 22.(7) 23.(5) 24.(9) 25.(1)

EXERCISE-4
Qus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. D B A D A A B C B B D A D C B A C B C C
Qus. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. A B B A D A B B B 1 1 4 1 3 198 2 4 – 1 2
Qus. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. 1 4 30 300 C 5 500 1 B B 2 D 600.00 84.00 C 24 B 03 A B
Qus. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Ans. 10 C D 48 B – A B D – B C A C B AB – D B ABC
Qus. 81 82 83 84 85 86
Ans. C CD BD B A B B,D

38. (9.00) 66. (2 cm, 1.0016) 70. (3.5 mm)

77. (A) → (P, S) ;(B) → (Q) ; (C) → (T) ; (D) → (R, S T)

102